UC-NRLF 


$B    E7M    MHb 


r^MSoa^L^  '• 


THE  EGYPT 
THAT  WAS 


4^ 


GIFT   OF 


r^-ab 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/egyptthatwaswithOOgartrich 


CL^y^  <^H^    /72.0. 


THE  EGYPT  THAT  WAS 

Within  fifteen  lessons  we  placed  the 
Twelve  Ages  for  George  Gartling 

BY  HIS  INVISIBLE  TEACHER.  MARCUS 


"Builded  h^  the  Gods  it  was,  within  which 
masters  gained  a  higher  consciousness.  " 


^ 


COPYRIGHTED  1919 
TEMPLE  OF  LIVING  THOUGHT 

4634  Fountain  Avenue 
LOS  ANGELES.  CALIFORNIA 


.^.-'^' 


^ 


DEDICATION 

In  loving  memonj   oi  tke  Lappij  kours  wken  we 
tLree  wandered  tLrou^  tke  ages  witk  Marcus. 

G.G. 


INTRODUCTION 


lllllillllllllllllllllllllllllll  .    ,  ,     ,  ,  , 

M  ^      ^  gS  a  man,  I  chose  naught  but  reason,  and  yet  the 

I  J— I  1  ways  of  life  and  the  thoughts  of  men  had  given 
1  ^ — •-  i  me  but  little.      But  one  day  1  felt  as  if  there 

|illlllllll illll>|  was  a  change,  and  then  there  came  unto  me 

llll|lllilll|llllll  one   ^^<>   called   himself    "Marcus,"    and   he 

Jig        told   me  of  the  many  things  that   I   should 

8  S  J        know.     A  man's  reason  W2w  not  mine  to  use; 

W  but  the  reasoning  powers  that  cometh  from 

the  great  invisible  forces. 

If  you  who  read  this  judge  harshly  the  ways  of  the 
Father,  then  thou  wilt  not  understand ;  but  if  thou  seekest, 
ais  I  did,  with  love  and  hope,  then  thou  wilt  read  it  and 
be  comforted. 

So  it  came  about  that  I,  in  my  plain  way,  chose  to 
find  some  method  that  I  could  write  these  things  and 
place  them  into  form. 

If  the  sunlight  is  clear  for  thee  when  thou  readest, 
unto  thee  will  be  given  many  things  as  it  hath  been  given 
unto  me. 

Across  the  sea  of  light  I  send  this  that  has  been  gath- 
ered together  by  Marcus  for  me.  May  it  prove  to  many 
the  link  that  connects  them  with  that  great,  unbounded 
place  wherein  dwelleth   all  things  that  the  Father  hath 

415560 


/creiated.''*'A'iicl''l* Will  wait  and  hope,  fully  knowing  and 
realizing  how  truly  beautiful  are  the  ways  of  He  who 
leadeth  us  day  by  day. 

It  has  been  a  work  for  those  of  us  whom  Marcus  hath 
come  unto,  to  make  it  full  of  happiness  and  love  and  trust. 
So  I  send  the  words  of  Marcus  into  the  great,  restless, 
heeding  world  that  it  may  find  a  place  among  them. 
That  it  may  find  a  welcome  into  many,  many  homes.  So 
in  my  way,  walking  as  I  do  among  men  and  women,  I 
hope  that  they  may  feel  kindly  toward  what  I  have  striven 
to  prepare  in  both  ways,  from  he  who  is  of  the  invisible 
and  I  who  live  among  men. 

GEORGE  GARTLING. 


PREFACE 


MARCUS— June  5,  1919 

I  have  decided  to  first  give  you  the  manner  ot  the 
numbering  of  your  lessons.    Beginning  with  the 

First  one,  place  it  as  the  third, 

The  second  as  the  first. 

The  third  as  the  second, 

The  seventh  as  the  fourth, 

The  sixth  as  the  fifth, 

The  ninth  as  the  seventh, 

Then  place  the  last  lesson  as  the  eighth. 

Then  take  the  ninth,  tenth,  eleventh  and  twelfth,  al- 
lowing all  the  rest  to  follow  as  I  have  given  them  to  you. 
That  is  the  method  of  placing  them  together,  as  that 
represents  the  centuries  that  followed  one  after  the  other 
in  the  great  consciousness. 


Tonight  we  will  follow  the  thought  entirely  within 
the  Egypt  That  Was.  In  order  that  you  may  understand 
your  last  lesson,  the  bringing  of  the  thought  of  the  Elec- 
tic  Circle  will  show  you  the  manner  by  which  the  Egypt 
That  Was  utilized  the  great  thought  of  Light,  not  placing 
it  as  a  Light  that  is  used  in  the  manner  that  the  follow- 
ing ages  afterwards  prove,  but  Light  according  to  the 
great  consciousness  as  it  was  used  within  that  Egypt. 
A  great  slumbering  city  in  its  quietness  with  no  shadow, 
neither  did  it  claim  confusion,  yet  in  its  highest  condition 

5 


of  what  would  be  known  as  spiritual  progress,  it  could 
not  be  compared  with  any  other.  Later  civilization,  as 
man  calls  it,  may  question  its  existence  and  call  it  a 
mirage  or  a  dream,  but  to  those  who  have  followed  out 
its  reflection  within  the  earth,  it  remains  one  great,  won- 
derful Mystery,  unknown  and  unsought  many  times  with 
countless  unknown  laws,  unknown  conditions  and  un- 
known thoughts  that  can  be  unfolded  and  traced  from 
the  first  great  placing  of  it  up  to  the  present  time.  Noth- 
ing unreal  about  it,  yet  the  lights  and  shadows  of  it 
flashed  forth  like  gems  whose  brilliancy  cannot  be 
equalled  anywhere  else.  Every  master  within  it  knows 
and  comprehends  fully  the  meaning  of  it  as  it  is.  And 
they  go  from  place  to  place  within  it,  finding  always 
ready  for  them,  a  higher  knowledge,  a  more  perfect 
thought,  nothing  dim  or  unreal  in  it  all.  Here  and  there 
as  the  purity  and  the  strength  of  spirit  passeth  hither 
and  thither  and  yonder  through  it,  the  harmony  of  it  all 
is  like  the  wondrous  breath  that  floats  over  it,  protect- 
ing, guiding  and  directing  it.  Its  great  Temples,  works 
of  art,  finer  than  man  can  conceive  of,  shine  forth  as 
if  the  perfection  of  it  was  greater  as  you  look  upon  it 
from  time  to  time.  Within  them  the  wondrous  flames 
of  purity  burn  ever,  and  the  passing  of  they  who  under- 
stand its  service  within,  hath  no  thought  save  that  they 
can  worship  there  that  which  created  them. 

Thou  who  seekest  a  knowledge  of  the  Egypt  That 
Was,  will  find  thyself  some  time  looking  closely  and 
seeking  out  the  thought  that  I  have  given  you  that  hath 
made  it,  for  thee,  a  reality  even  within  physical  being. 

Within  the  Egypt  That  Was,  the  triumph  of  spiritual- 
ity is  like  that  which  flows  forth  unceasing  in  its  gran- 
deur. Here  and  there  and  everywhere,  lifting  themselves 
as  if  they  were  more  perfect  than  others,  are  wonderful 
completed  pictures  carved  and  placed,  that  they,  the  mas- 

6 


ters,  should  become  cognizant  that  their  work  was  fin- 
ished for  this  great  city. 

By  the  side  of  one  of  these  stands  a  master  builder. 
He  has  never  known  aught  save  the  perfect  fittings  of 
all  things,  and  yet  he  finds  himself  questioning  as  if 
some  current  of  thought  had  led  him  here  to  trace  out 
through  this  perfect  form  and  give  him  what  he  sought. 
He  looks  out  over  the  vast  concourse  of  people  and  from 
among  their  number  he  calls  the  name  of  one  he  has 
known  and  wandered  with  through  many  great  condi- 
tions. With  a  thought  he  calls  him,  and  the  beauty  of 
the  language  is  like  the  soothing  fall  of  the  quiet  night. 
"Why  standest  thou,"  he  said  unto  this  master,  "what  is 
it  that  thou  questioneth  about?  Hast  thou  no  word 
from  he  who  is  the  great  master  of  Egypt?  Or  hath 
he  given  thee  something  greater  to  do  than  thou  hast 
ever  done?"  "Yea",  he  said,  "he  hath  given  me  a  mar- 
ble, a  symbol  of  a  marble,  and  he  saith  unto  me,  *when 
thou  hast  reasoned  with  thyself  and  hath  understood, 
then  I  wouldst  that  thou  shouldst  come  unto  me.' "  Soft 
and  blue  was  the  haze  that  fell  over  this  wonderful  city 
and  the  master  stood  closer  yet  to  this  perfect  statue. 
The  hands  seemed  as  if  within  them  they  held  a  secret, 
and  he  touched  them  with  his  own.  "Offtimes,"  he  said, 
"have  I  looked  and  wondered  if  there  could  be  a  more 
perfect  place  than  our  Egypt.  I  have  wondered  if  there 
was  a  wisdom  greater,  a  knowledge  grander  or  a  con- 
sciousness higher.  It  comes  to  me  and  flits  with  me 
whenever  I  strive,  as  thou  knowest  I  often  do,  to  place  a 
purer  thought  within  this  wondrous  marble.  They  have 
brought  to  me  one  of  the  purest  stones  that  I  have  ever 
handled.  Come  thou  with  me,  Marcus,  I  wouldst  have 
thee  see  and  know  something  of  my  thought." 

Through  the  streets  of  the  city  we  walked  together 
and  at  last  we  entered  a  low,  rambling  building;  within 

7 


it,  crowded  it  seemed  as  if  with  the  greatest  works  of  art. 
Here  and  there  in  the  cool  corridors  a  floating  vision  of 
lightness  and  airiness  was  placed  as  if  a  moment  and  they 
would  take  their  winged  way  far  into  the  great  universes 
that  lie  beyond  the  Egypt  That  Was.  The  Master  led 
me  into  a  low  room,  fitted  as  thou  wouldst  say,  to  work 
in.  Here  and  there  and  everywhere  were  great  plans 
that  he  had  drawn.  He  said  unto  me :  "Hast  thou  had  a 
vision  greater  than  thou  hast  ever  had?  It  seemed  as  if 
thy  spirit  would  never  be  satisfied  until  it  had  reached 
a  greater  height.  Why  art  thou  not  with  us  at  all  times  r 
Why  wanderest  thou  afar?  Findest  thou  aught  that  is 
greater  than  Egypt?"  He  laughed  and  said:  "My  friend, 
there  is  naught  that  has  ever  been  made  as  perfect  as 
that  which  striveth  to  make  more  perfect.  See  thou  this 
block  of  marble?  It  is  my  wish  and  desire  that  I  carve 
it  that  it  may  stand  within  the  eternal  heights."  I  looked 
upon  him,  for  had  I  not  known  the  building  of  Egypt, 
the  beloved  place  where  we  had  been  taught  so  many 
things.  "Why  seekest  thou  to  place  it  within  the  eternal 
heights?"  "Listen,  Marcus,"  he  said,  "not  long  and  I  go 
hence  and  I  would  finish  this  that  it  may  be  placed  by  he 
whose  hands  are  greater  than  mine.  Watch  thou  with 
me  a  little  while." 

He  took  and  began  to  mold  this  block  of  marble,  so 
pure  it  was  it  seemed  as  if  only  a  touch  and  it  began  to 
form  itself  into  a  wondrous  condition.  I  said  no  word 
unto  him,  I  only  waited.  Outside  the  dripping  of  the 
fountains  and  the  murmur  of  many  thoughts  as  if  they 
whom  we  had  known  and  loved  held  converse  one  with 
the  other.  And  then  thou  camest  unto  us.  I  had  missed 
thee  from  Egypt;  I  had  wondered  whither  thou  hadst 
gone.  Softly  thou  didst  rest  a  while  and  the  master 
worked  on.  Here  and  there  he  touched  it  and  his  hands 
seemed  as  if  the  mystery  of  the  eternal  was  weaving  a 

8 


figure,  making  it  supremely  wonderful.  At  last  he  stopped 
his  work  and,  turning  unto  you,  he  said :  "Whither  hast 
thou  been?  Egypt  hast  missed  thee.  And  we  nave 
spoken  of  thee  many  times.  What  is  it  that  hath  claimed 
thee?"  And  then  thou  didst  say:  "Knowest  thou  not 
that  I  have  been  about  my  Father's  business?  The  Egypt 
that  must  hold  a  place  hath  need  of  great  foundations, 
and  from  my  Universe  I  must  bring  that  which  shall  es- 
tablish what  the  Father  hath  asked  of  me."  "What,  saith 
thou,"  I  said,  unto  thee,  "what  great  consciousness  must 
thou  place?"  And  then  thou  didst  tell  us  of  a  new  planet 
within  which  they  saith  Egypt  must  find  a  place.  Into 
it  must  come  from  out  of  the  Holy  Places  many  things. 
From  the  height  must  we  draw,  as  it  were,  the  greatness 
that  shall  form  a  place  within  it."  Three  times,  thou 
didst  tell  us,  shall  Egypt  find  a  place  within  this  planet. 
The  master  who  had  molded  looked  upon  thee  and  said  : 
"Truly  the  Father  giveth  thee  more  to  do  than  any  of 
us.  Where  is  this  place?  How  shall  I  find  it?  Who  is 
it  that  hath  called  forth  such  a  creation  that  our  Egypt 
shall  find  a  place  within  it?"  Even  now,  I,  Marcus,  hear 
within  the  movements  of  our  old  Egypt  a  consciousness 
lifting  itself  and  mingling  with  our  thought.  The  mas- 
ter said:  "Shall  it  be  great?"  And  thou  didst  answer: 
"Yes,  it  shall  be  great,  for  the  Father  saith  it  must  live 
ages  and  ages;  portions  of  it  must  be  placed  here  and 
there  and  everywhere." 

Then  thou  didst  tell  us  of  its  creation.  Thou  didst  tell 
us  of  all  that  would  surround  it.  And  then  we  talked 
together,  taking  from  out  of  the  knowledge  of  Egypt 
That  Was  that  the  Egypt  of  To  Be  should  be  likened  unto 
it.  Once  more  the  master  uncovered  his  block  of  marble. 
"I  will  hasten,"  he  said,  "lest  I  be  not  ready  to  go  with 
thee  when  thou  shalt  be  called  upon  to  go  hither,  and  I 
wouldst  that  this  should  be  finished."    Again  the  hands 

9 


that  wove  the  clear  pattern  worked  with  the  marble. 
Strangely  sweet  was  the  form  and  the  draperies  that  he 
clothed  it  with  that  fell  like  soft  veils  around  it.  Looking 
forth  thru  the  archways  I  saw  many  a  radiant  picture  of 
our  Egypt  That  Was;  its  greatness  and  its  grandeur — 
and  I  wondered  if  we  could  translate  it  and  place  it  upon 
a  planet.  *" 

The  master  finished  all  but  the  face  of  his  figure,  and 
then  he  seemed  to  hesitate.  "Listen,"  he  said,  "I  feel 
as  if  there  was  a  call,  as  if  from;  out  of  the  greatness  of 
Immensity  there  was  a  call,  as  if  the  thought  was  sweet, 
sweet,  in  its  utterance,  yet  majestic  and  grand,  com- 
manding and  kinglike.  It  is  a  strange  thought  I  hear,  I 
thinketh  me  I  have  not  heard  it  before."  In  silence  we 
waited  and  thru  the  silence  drifted  the  sweetness  of  the 
thought,  and  thou  looked  upon  us  and  in  the  quietness, 
thou  didst  say  unto  us:  "Hast  thou  never  heard  it?" 
"Listen,  and  I  will  tell  it  unto  thee."  "Let  me  say  that 
thou  must  understand — it  was  on  the  yesternight  and  I 
knew  within  my  Universe  that  I  must  go  into  the  heights. 
I  went  my  way.  The  breath  of  the  Infinite  overshadowed 
me.  I  looked  into  the  heights  and  I  saw  a  shining  figure 
clothed  with  the  raiments  of  purity,  truth  and  love. 
Closer  it  came  to  me,  and  with  a  vision  of  sweetness 
spake:  'Thou  art  building  and  placing  the  foundations 
for  My  Father's  place.  Within  it  thou  art  working  out  a 
plan  for  His  knowledge  to  live  within  it.'  I  looked  upon 
Him  and  I  knew  He  was  the  Son  of  the  Father."  What 
was  it  that  seemed  to  float  around  us  as  a  breath,  as  thou 
spake  unto  us? 

What  was  it  that  seemed  to  fill  the  air  with  a  silvery 
radiance?  I  say  unto  thee,  full  and  truly,  for  as  thou 
writest  this  and  thinketh  of  it,  thou  shalt  know  how  won- 
drously  beautiful  it  was. 

A  moment  and  He  who  was  with  us.  He  who  claimeth 

10 


the  first  thought  for  the  earth,  and  thou  didst  say  unto 
us :  "This  is  He,  He  who  hath  asked  of  His  Father  and 
for  whom  we  shall  work  and  plan  and  serve;  He  who 
hath  asked  that  the  Egypt  That  Was  shall  be  placed  as 
a  reflection  within  the  earth."  Low  His  voice  as  He 
spake  unto  us:  "Place  thou,'*  He  said,  "first  a  great 
Truth  within  the  earth;  let  it  be  strong  and  true  in  all 
ways.  They  who  hath  served  My  Father  knowest  and 
understandeth  it.  Then  thou  shalt  bring  from  out  of  thy 
Universe  that  which  shall  hold  the  foundations  together 
and  they  shall  be  the  greater  consciousness  growing  and 
welding  and  holding  themselves  together  until  the  very 
end  when  all  things  that  have  been  of  Egypt  shall  be  re- 
turned unto  her  again.  Then  thou  shalt  lift  above  it  the 
wonderful  structure  that  shall  stand  through  three  great 
habitations ;  yea,  verily,  even  unto  the  fourth,  and  it  shall 
be  that  which  shall  hold  for  all  men  a  place.  And  thou 
shalt  place  it  in  pure  form,  let  the  Light  that  guideth  and 
leadeth  us  shine  ever  above  it.  Let  that  which  giveth  it 
Light  be  of  the  Father;  but  its  buildings  shall  be  as  I 
giveth  it  unto  it.  Maketh  it  worthy  of  what  thy  thought 
is  that  when  I  cometh  unto  it  I  shall  find  it  ready." 

The  slumbering  sweetness  of  a  new  day  bathed  the 
earth  in  fullness  and  beauty,  and  thou  and  I  stood  in  the 
first  great  habitation,  with  all  ready  to  place  as  we  had 
been  told  to  do.  Long  hath  it  been  and  again  the  second 
habitation  called  for  us  to  still  place  a  clearer  reflection 
of  the  Egypt  That  Was.  Across  the  windswept  condi- 
tion floated  a  thought  held  by  us  of  many  Universes  as 
we  gathered  and  protected  the  reflection  of  Egypt.  And 
the  third  habitation  claimed  again  our  service  and  our 
work.  It  remaineth  yet  for  no  hand,  no  force,  no  element, 
naught  can  do  away  with  it.  Its  symbols  are  as  fresh 
as  when  the  masters  of  many  Universes  placed  them  upon 
the  stones.    Its  Temples  are  as  clear  and  as  plain,  and 

11 


the  sands  have  not  swept  over  any  portion  of  it.  How 
keepeth  we  it?  What  hath  we  that  the  power  is  given 
unto  us  that  it  shall  not  pass  into  ruin?  Hath  thou  not 
heard?  Hath  thou  not  understood?  Truly  thou  must 
know  when  Infinite  and  Divinity  giveth  it  all,  it  cannot 
pass  away. 

So  when  it  was  ready  that  thou  shouldst  know,  within 
the  physical,  I  came  unto  thee. 

Let  this  be  thy  first  lesson,  as  it  is  the  last  of  the  con- 
sciousness of  Egypt  for  thee  until  thou  standest  truly  as 
spirit  within  the  City  of  Egypt  That  Was  and  when  thou 
lookest  into  the  eternal  heights  thou  shalt  find  the  statue 
of  he  who  made  it  ready  to  fill  its  place ;  and  when  thou 
asketh  who  it  is,  I  say  unto  thee,  it  was  Imhotep. 

The  gorgeous  colorings  of  the  Egypt  That  Was  so 
full  of  its  royal  splendor  is  the  fitting  word  of  she  whom 
thou  knowest  cometh  unto  thee  bringing  thee  many  times 
a  quietness,  a  thought  and  a  love  that  is  greater  than  all 
thou  hast  ever  known. 

Across  the  vision  the  spirit  flits.  Always  and  for- 
ever the  knowledge  of  the  presence  of  Divinity — great  as 
a  master,  loving  as  a  brother,  royal  as  a  king,  yet  always 
gentle  and  sweet,  and  the  breath  of  Egypt  That  Was 
floats  upward  and  onward  into  the  presence  of  the  In- 
finite filled  full  of  our  worship  and  our  service. 


QUESTIONS  AND  ANSW^ERS 

Q.  Why  were  the  lessons  given  that  way?  Could  they  not 
have  been  given  in  order? 

A.  No,  because  I  had  to  gather  together  from  out  of  the 
different  ages  and  place  them  when  I  procured  them  for  myself. 

If  you  will  read  them  as  I  have  directed  you,  you  will  find 
they  are  perfect  in  the  placing. 

12 


Q.    All  I  have  gotten  now,  can  go  in  one  Book? 
A.    Yes,   Sir. 

This  that  I  have  given  you  tonight  may  be  called  the 
Preface. 

Q.    What  shall  I  call  this  Book? 

A.    The  Egypt  That  Was. 

Three  times  Marcus  changed  his  robe.  The  first  time  I 
(Mrs.  L.)  saw  him  he  stood  like  a  workman,  wore  a  short 
jacket.  Then  he  changed  his  clothing  and  was  dressed  as  an 
Egyptian.  And  then  when  he  changed  his  robe  the  last  time 
it  was  white  with  purple  and  the  silver  symbols  in  it.  Marcus, 
says:  "I  wanted  to  take  you  thru  three  great  conditions — one 
as  he  who  buildeth  and  worketh;  one  as  he  holdeth  the  sym- 
bols of  knowledge;  and  one  who  serves  He  who  is  the  King 
and  the  Master  of  the  Silver  Brotherhood." 


13 


LESSON  I 


MARCUS— January  3,  1918 

In  the  first  great  century  before  the  beginning  of  the 
First  Pharaoh,  you  and  I  were  called  to  stand  within  the 
great  consciousness  of  the  Father's  holy  thought.  Let 
me  tell  it  unto  you  as  it  was.  And  no  shadow  fell  twixt 
thee  and  me,  and  the  great,  wondrous  Pharaoh,  he  who 
held  within  the  Atlanteans  a  place  and  carried  with  him 
the  gracious  Law,  stopped  within  our  Universe  and  he 
took  from  out  of  that  which  had  formed  the  building  of 
many  a  wondrous  temple,  that  which  thou  and  I  must 
gather  together.  Holy,  indeed,  was  his  presence.  And 
when  thou  hast  taken  and  gathered  together  the  Law 
which  is  for  you  and  me,  within  which  are  many  meas- 
urements and  out  of  which  the  great  Israelitish  nation 
produced  what  was  afterwards  known  as  the  Book  of 
Deuteronomy.  Very  gracious  was  his  presence  and  he 
spake  with  us  and  he  gave  us  the  great  mathematical 
knowledge  for  earth.  He  said :  "Thou  shalt  only  measure 
it  by  the  four  corners  of  the  earth,  for  in  thy  measure- 
ment thou  shalt  find  that  thou  hast  left  room  enough 
for  all  the  gracious  presence  that  may  be  called  from 
the  mighty  hosts."  Then  he  took  three  stones  and  laid 
them  side  by  side  and  he  said  unto  you:  "Thou  sh.ilt 
go  with  me,  for  thou  shalt  know  that  two  spiritual 
Pharoahs  must  be  with  the  great  and  wondrous  condition 
of  the  earth  before  it  is  called  and  placed  in  condensed 
form." 

14 


The  other  Pharaoh  was  one  of  the  great  Udanic  Race. 
He,  it  was,  who  carried,  as  it  were,  the  fulfillment  of  the 
Law. 

All  this  thou  must  know  is  within  spirit. 

And  we  went  and  we  stood  where  we  could  see. 
Mighty  were  the  hosts  that  gathered  within  the  four 
corners  of  the  earth.  ^  And  again  he  said  unto  us :  "Thou 
must  hold  the  calculation  correct,  for  thou  must  not  only 
measure,  but  thou  must  make  the  measurement  so  per- 
fect that  in  the  great  spheres  which  the  Father  will  create, 
there  shall  be  not  even  the  fraction  of  a  cubit  that  does 
not  join  with  all  cubits."  And  he  who  was  with  him 
took  within  his  hand  a  glass  and  within  the  glass  was 
a  six-pointed  needle,  and  he  said:  "Four  points  of  the 
needle  shall  point  to  the  corners  of  the  earth,  but  two 
points  of  the  needle  shall  point  to  the  spheres  and  to  the 
orbit  world."* 

Thou  didst  not  question,  neither  did  I.  Then  we  saw 
that  the  Father's  creation  held  a  blue  light,  and  the  sec- 
ond Pharaoh  took  from  out  the  wonderful  atmosphere 
and  molded  within  his  hand,  the  beautiful,  blue  stone — 
the  color  thereof  holds  even  unto  this  day  within  the 
archives  where  the  sand  hath  blown  over  it  and  the  ages 
have  swept  with  a  mighty  hand  across  the  face  of  it,  but 
it  still  holds  the  blue  which  the  second  Pharaoh  molded 
out  of  the  pure  atmosphere  of  God.  Once  more  he 
stooped  and  from  out  of  the  matter  portion  of  earth  he 
took  some  clay  and  he  gave  it  unto  you  and  he  said: 


♦What  is  Orbit  World? 

That  which  holds  within  it  the  laws  that  control  all  things 
within  the  orbit  of  the  earth,  or  as  you  would  say,  it  is  the  aura 
of  all  great  bodies  within  the  earth's  orbit  that  holds  and  pro- 
tects them  by  the  law  within  it.  It  holds  the  etheric  fluid  that  is 
used  by  planetary  spirit  and  is  their  sustenance. 

15 


"And  thou  shalt  mold  it" — and  as  thou  didst  mold  it, 
there  were  two  colors  within  it — one  was  red  and  the 
other  was  yellow — and  he  said:  "And  thou  shalt  have 
a  consciousness  with  us  and  thou  shalt  have  a  conscious- 
ness when  the  race  shall  be  red  and  again  thou  shalt  have 
a  consciousness  when  the  race  shall  be  yellow."*  And  he 
took  the  two  stones  in  his  hand.  Then  the  first  Pharoah 
took  from  out  the  earth  and  molded  in  his  hands  the  clay 
and  it  was  black,  and  he  said :  **I  give  unto  this  the  Law, 
for  it  is  the  earth  and  the  earth  shall  move  many  thou- 
sands of  years  before  within  it  will  be  a  Pure  Law."  Unto 
you  (Mr.  G.)  that  Law  shall  be  unknown  till  thou  know- 
est  and  be  within  the  pure  land  of  the  spirit.  And  he 
handed  you  what  he  had  molded  and  it  was  like  unto  a 
stone  and  Pharaoh  had  the  three  stones,  but  within  them 
were  the  four  colors.  And  he  said  unto  me,  Marcus: 
"Thou  shalt  plant  four  of  them  in  the  four  corners  of  the 
earth  and  it  shall  be  that  thou  hast  builded  well."t  And 
he  took  the  black  stone  and  he  took  the  red  stone  and 
he  took  the  yellow  stone  and  he  divided  them  and  placed 
them  within  the  four  corners  of  the  earth.  But  the  blue 
stone  he  left  for  thee. 

Then  they  went  their  way,  and  I  also ;  but  thou  didst 
go  unto  the  place  which  is  known  as  Zaphata  and  there 
thou  didst  know  those  were  mighty  as  spirit,  greater 
than  earth  hath  ever  known,  and  within  thy  hand  thou 
didst  carry  the  blue  stone,  and  when  thou  didst  stand 


♦Who  were  the  Red  and  Yellow  Races? 

The  first  one  was  the  Atlanteans  (red)  and  the  yellow  ones 
were  the  Udans  (Chinese).  That  is  only  a  form  of  expressing 
this  separateness  of  the  races  for  spirit. 

fThe  four  colors  Marcus  planted  in  the  four  corners  of  the 
Earth,  does  that  symbolize  the  four  habitations  of  earth? 
Yes. 

16 


in  the  midst  of  them,  thou  didst  show  them  the  stone, 
and  they  said  unto  thee:  "Stranger,  thou  cometh  from 
the  Seventh  Universe,  knowest  thou  not  that  our  Tem- 
ple waiteth  that  thou  shalt  place  v^ithin  it  the  blue  stone 
which  is  to  us  the  Almighty — Almighty  AUathami,  which 
shall  be  for  us  undisturbed  as  long  as  the  Father  is?" 
And  thou  didst  take  with  thee  the  blue  stone  and  thou 
didst  say  unto  them:  ''Bring  unto  me  a  white  stone" 
and  thou  didst  take  it  and  lay  it  where  they  wished  that 
thou  shouldst,  and  thou  didst  lay  upon  it  the  blue  stone ; 
and  when  it  had  lain  there,  thou  lifted  it  and  upon  tue 
face  of  the  stone  was  the  symbol  of  Almighty  God.  And 
thou  didst  call  upon  us  who  were  the  masters  of  the 
Seventh  Universe,  and  we  came  unto  thee  and  there 
were  six  of  us.  And  we  stood  around  the  stone  and  we 
lifted  that  which  seemeth  the  measurements  by  cubits, 
and  then  when  we  had  measured  it,  we  placed  upon  it  six 
symbols  of  the  Universe  of  the  Seventh,  and  in  the 
placing  we  placed  the  Purity  of  the  Thought  that  belongs 
to  our  Brotherhood. 

This  belongeth  in  the  spirit. 

I  cannot  say  unto  you  that  it  was  one  thousand  or  two 
thousand  or  more  time,  for  with  the  passing  of  time  with 
spirit  it  is  like  the  flitting  of  the  sunlight  across  the 
moment  of  day.  But  I  know  that  thou  saith  unto  me: 
"I  will  go  to  earth,  for  knowest  thou  not  that  the  third 
Pharaoh  rules  in  old  Egypt  alone?"  And  thou  didst  take 
upon  thee  an  etheric  body  and  it  was  likened  unto  those 
who  dwelt  within  Egypt.  And  thou  didst  take  for  thy 
royal  trappings  the  stripes  of  blue  and  red  and  yellow 
and  black;  and  thou  wert  counted  among  the  Nobles  of 
the  Seventh  Race  of  Egypt.  No  man  asked  of  thee 
whither  thou  didst  come,  neither  didst  they  question  thee 
as  to  who  were  thy  people,  for  they  knew  that  thou  must 
be  of  a  royal  house  or  thou  couldst  not  have  had  what 

17 


thou  didst.  And  they  spake  unto  thee,  they  who  served 
the  King,  and  they  said:  "Art  thou  a  magi  of  the  far 
East?"  And  thou  didst  answer  them  and  say:  ''Ah, 
farther  than  where  the  waters  roll  and  if  thou  countest 
thou  wilt  find  it  where  the  sun  sets  and  it  shall  be  West 
instead  of  East."  But  they  laughed  at  thee  and  they 
said :  "So  speaketh  all  the  magi  for  they  have  the  Law 
and  the  Knowledge,  while  thou  hast  more  than  any  as 
yet,  for  did  not  the  King  Pharaoh  send  unto  thee  and 
did  he  not  give  thee  the  many  chains  of  gold  and  copper 
that  thou  wearest  around  thy  neck?"  And  one  day  when 
thou  didst  go  unto  the  great  palace  of  the  Pharoah  he 
said  unto  thee :  "Surely  thou  didst  know  that  I  needed 
thee — but  where  is  he  who  stood  with  thee  when  the 
second  Pharaoh  placed  the  stones — and  I  would  ask 
thee,  for  I  needeth  them."  Then  thou  didst  say  unto 
him :  "I  will  send  for  him  who  cometh  from  my  Cycle." 
He  said :  "Say  unto  him  to  bring  unto  me  the  stones  that 
are  likened  unto  those  which  were  given  unto  Pharaoh 
the  Second."  And  he  showed  thee  the  many  buildings 
with  their  wondrous  carvings  and  their  heights,  greater 
than  the  earth  giveth  a  history  of,  and  from  top  to  bot- 
tom were  they  carved.  Sonie  of  them  were  of  pure 
white  marble  and  some  of  them  were  of  ivory.  Some 
were  of  porphery  and  some  were  of  the  green  jade.  Over 
to  the  east  of  this  great  building  had  he  placed  five  pil- 
lars of  lapis  lazuli.  But  when  he  spake  unto  thee  thou 
didst  say  unto  him:  "Pharaoh,  knowest  thou  that  thy 
lapis  lazuli  hath  not  within  it  the  Purity  of  Thought,  for 
thou  canst  not  trace  the  golden  threads  within  it?"  He 
said :  "When  thou  cometh  again  bring  thou  thy  comrade 
and  I  will  send  unto  thee  the  royal  robes  of  my  scribe, 
for  I  wouldst  that  my  nation  should  know  that  it  hath 
need  of  one."  "Lookest  thou  upon  the  pillars,  seeth  thou 
that  they  have  carved  them  but  they  have  written  no 

18 


words  and  I  wouldst  that  the  world  and  the  great  earth 
within  which  I  have  planted  this,  shall  have  the  spirit 
of  the  word  within  it,  for  I  have  come  from  that  which 
held  the  great  Spirit  of  the  Law."  And  thou  didst  go 
thy  way  and  thou  didst  enter  into  thine  own  place  and 
thou  didst  say  unto  those  who  waited  for  thee :  "I  give 
audience  this  day  unto  no  mjan  save  he  who  shall  come 
from  the  great  Temple  of  the  Pharaoh  and  his  name  thou 
shalt  know  when  he  giveth  it  unto  thee  as  'Imhotep/  " 
And  thou  didst  go  into  thy  inner  room  and  thou  didst 
take  within  thy  hand  the  circle  that  the  mark  upon  it  is 
likened  unto  the  old  Zodiac  of  the  Atlanteans.  And  thou 
didst  lay  it  upon  a  great,  black  tablet  (table)  ana  wnen 
the  light  of  the  sun  fell  upon  its  center,  thou  didst  know 
that  thou  hadst  thy  answer  and  that  I,  Marcus,  would 
be  with  thee  ere  the  light  fell  upon  it  once  more. 

Then  thou  didst  go  into  the  outer  Court  and  while 
thou  didst  wait,  there  came  unto  thee  the  Chief  High 
Priest  of  the  Temple  of  the  Pharaoh  and  he  said  unto 
thee:  "I  am  Imhotep  and  I  come  unto  thee  that  thou 
mayst  know  that  I  am  ready  to  fulfill  thy  mission."  And 
he  laughed  and  he  said  unto  thee:  "Surely  thou  know- 
est  that  I  have  come  with  an  etheric  body,  as  thou  hast, 
and  Pharaoh  knowest  me  not  as  Imhotep,  but  he  hath 
given  me  charge  over  the  carvings  of  the  pillars.  But 
thou  knowest  I  cannot  give  thee  the  words  of  the  Law. 
But  when  thou  waitest  for  the  coming  of  he  who  shall 
be  the  scribe,  then  wilt  thou  know  and  understand  that 
I  served  the  Pharaoh  because  he  belongeth  unto  those 
who  are  of  our  Universe." 

Around  and  about  within  the  court  yard  white  doves 
circled  and  the  whirr  of  their  wings  mingled  with  the 
splash  of  many  waters.  The  quiet  serving  man  brought 
the  iced  drinks  and  the  cooled  fruits  and  ye  did  eat  of 
them  that  thou  shouldst  take  a  closer  form  around  thy 

19 


body  for  thou  now  must  enter  into  a  contact  with  ma- 
terial conditions.* 

Very  silently  did  the  hours  of  earth  pass  for  you  and 
Imhotep.  You  spake  of  the  great  conditions  when  first 
as  formless  spirit  thou  didst  wait  the  knowledge  of  thy 
Father.  To  thee  it  came  with  that  which  gave  thee  the 
power  of  being  of  service,  even  unto  the  greater  days. 
To  Imhotep  it  came  as  the  knowledge  that  he  should  first 
seek  a  place  within  earth.  Still  he  knew  as  he  spake  with 
thee,  that  spirit  is  not  restricted  in  its  consciousness  of 
earth.  He  spake  of  those  who  waited  within  the  con- 
fines of  the  great  condition  to  watch  that  which  should 
follow,  and  then  thou  didst  say  unto  him :  "Imhotep,  in 
all  thy  great  conditions,  hast  thou  found  aught  that  hold- 
eth  within  it  an  earth  like  unto  this?"  And  he  answered 
thee:  "Nay,  not  so,  but  thou  knowest  that  there  must 
be  those  who  follow  me  that  shall  gather  together  a 
knowledge  of  many  things.  And  when  I  seek  to  reign 
in  Egypt  it  shall  be  that  I  seek  to  hold  my  spirit  within 
physical  consciousness  that  it  may  know  the  full  mean- 
ing of  what  earth  really  is."  The  hours  of  the  day  closed 
around  you,  the  low  notes  of  a  night  bird  calling  to  its 
n^te  drifted  in  thru  the  leafy  trees  that  grew  outside 
your  dwelling  place,  here  and  there  the  soft  footfall  of 
those  who  served  broke  the  quiet  silence.  Once  you  went 
to  where  the  water  fell  in  a  soft  splash  in  a  marble  basin, 
you  dipped  your  hands  within  it  and  cooled  them,  as  it 
were,  for  you  felt  the  pressure  of  the  physical  influence 
that  came  to  your  etheric  body.  Imhotep  came  and  stood 
beside  you  and  he  said  :  "Dost  thou  miss  thy  place  within 
the  Seventh  Universe?"  And  across  the  low  vibrant 
tones  with  which  he  spake,  there  was  more  than  a  ques- 


*See  end  of  lesson  for  answer  to  some  questions  that  were 
asked  at  this  point. 

20 


tion.  Turning,  you  said  unto  him :  "Yea,  verily,  but  we 
must  know  so  that  when  we  place  within  the  stones  the 
symbols  they  must  have  within  them  a  deeper  thought, 
a  greater  knowledge  and  a  purer  love,  that  it  may  last 
ages  upon  ages,  last  until  all  knowledge  of  either  Egypt 
or  its  people  has  passed  away." 

Ere  the  sunlight  of  another  day  fell,  Imhotep  had 
gone  his  way  to  serve  within  the  palace  of  the  Pharaoh. 
Was  he  called  ''Imhotep  ?"  Nay,  he  was  called  "Quais," 
and  they  only  knew  him  as  one  who  served  the  King. 
And  then  I  came  unto  thee  and  I  said  unto  thee :  *'And 
what  is  it  that  we  shall  do?"  And  thou  saith:  **Go  thou 
and  bring  together  the  knowledge  of  the  stones  that  lyeth 
within  the  four  corners  of  the  earth."  Then  he  said  unto 
thee :  "Thou  knowest  that  there  are  only  the  three  colors. 
What  shall  I  do? — have  only  those?"  And  thou  saith 
unto  him :  "I  have  with  me  that  which,  is  the  blue  stone 
— gather  thou  the  others  together."  And  I  went  my  way 
and  from  the  north  and  the  south  and  the  east  and  the 
west,  did  I  bring  unto  thee  the  colors  that  thou  didst 
ask  and  the  stones  thereof.  Then  thou  didst  go  unto 
Pharaoh  the  Third,  according  to  the  spirit,  and  Marcus 
clothed  himself  in  the  royal  robes  of  the  scribe  and  he 
taketh  with  him  a  tablet  of  pure  m/arble,  and  when  thou 
didst  come  and  had  thine  audience  with  the  King,  thou 
didst  say  unto  him:  "I  have  done  as  thou  saith."  He 
said:  "It  is  well.  What  shall  my  scribe  write  first?  Unto 
thee  do  I  give,  this  day,  the  right."  And  thou  didst 
turn  and  say  unto  me:  "Write  these  words — 'THERE 
IS  NONE  GREATER  THAN  THE  FATHER.^ "  And 
Pharaoh  said:  "It  is  well  written.  Place  thou  the  first 
symbol  of  Egypt  and  it  shall  be  a  bird  and  it  shall  have 
a  crown  upon  its  head  and  there  shall  be  many  feathers 
upon  it."  And  even  unto  this  day  thou  knowest  that  it  is 
one  of  the  symbols  of  Egypt.     "And  the  bird  shall  be 

21 


the  message,  the  crown  shall  be  obedience  to  the  Father, 
but  the  feathers  shall  be  all  of  those  who  shall  be  called 
*  Egyptians' ". 

Then  I  said  unto  the  King :  "O,  great  King  of  Egypt, 
which  is  known  as  the  Pharaoh,  what  shall  the  scribe 
say  with  regard  to  the  talons  of  the  bird?"     And  the 
King  saith :  "And  it  shall  be  this :  'That  all  nations  shall 
be  gathered  together,  gathered  by  the  greater  need  that 
shall  be  for  them  when  they  have  no  knowledge  of  the 
Father/  "     And  then  when  thou  wert  ready  and  I  had 
written  it  according  as  it  should  be,  Pharaoh  called  unto 
seven  men  of  his  household.     Three  of  them  were  of 
the  High  Priests  and  three  of  them  were  his  Chief  Men 
and  one  of  them  was  he  whom  thou  knowest  as  Imhotep, 
but  the  King  called  him  by  the  name  that  he  gave  unto 
thee.    And  they  took  with  them  a  small  instrument  about 
the  size  of  your  hand  and  it  was  made  of  gold,  beaten 
down  until  it  was  smooth,  and  they  took  with  them  the 
sand  and  they  mixed  with  it  a  red  clay  and  some  water, 
and  when  thou  had  taken  with  thee  the  scribe,  which 
was  myself,  we  laid  the  stones  that  I  had  brought,  and 
there  was  the  red  one  and  the  yellow  one  and  the  black 
one.     And  when  the  King  said  unto  thee:     "There  are 
but  three  stones"  thou  didst  take  the  blue  one  and  thou 
didst  fit  it  together,  and  the  King  knew  that  thou  hadst 
built  within  Old  Egypt  the  Basic  Law  of  the   Father, 
which  gave  unto  four  races  the  knowledge  that  the  First 
Pharaoh  gave  unto  thee  and  unto  me,  when  we  stood  and 
looked  upon  what  the  Father  had  created. 

What  didst  thou  do  when  the  stones  were  laid?  Thou 
didst  measure  them,  and  on  one  side  were  three  cubits, 
on  the  other  side  were  three  cubits,  and  the  four  sides 
were  equal,  and  thou  didst  think  within  thyself — Twelve 
times  shall  the  great  Law  be.  Twelve  times  shall  the 
Universes    move   within    the    Thought    of   the    Father. 

22 


Twelve  shall  be  the  numbering  of  the  Tribes,  and 
Twelve  shall  be  the  Disciples  of  the  Son  of  God.  What 
thinketh  thou?  Knoweth  thou  aught  of  what  the  sym- 
bols holdeth?  Thinketh  thou  aught  of  the  measurement? 
Thinketh  thou  of  the  colors  thou  hast  placed?  And  as 
thou  thinketh,  knowest  thou  even  now,  that  the  nations 
of  the  earth — the  red,  the  yellow  and  the  black — holdeth 
a  spiritual  knowledge  that  the  blue  stone  formed  the 
key  of. 

I  say  unto  thee :  Why  seeketh  thou  within  still  water 
for  the  knowledge  that  floweth  from  the  great  Fountain- 
head?  Rather  wouldst  thou  turn  thy  face  toward  that 
which  is  greater  and  the  consciousness  of  thy  spirit  can 
keep  thee  where  thou  wouldst  go. 


QUESTIONS  AND  ANSWERS 

Q.     Marcus,  how  is  this  done? 

A.  An  etheric  body,  if  it  wishes  to  handle  physical  things 
and  material  things,  can  utilize  the  atoms  within  the  atmosphere 
and  for  a  certain  length  of  time  utilize  that  around  the  etheric 
body,  and  move  material  things  with  the  strength  of  it;  can 
utilize  forces  and  mingle  with  human  beings  closer. 

Q.  What  was  there,  in  the  taking  of  the  iced  drinks  and 
the  cooled  fruits  that  produced  this? 

A.  In  the  taking,  the  spirit  of  both  knew  th?*  they  break 
bread  together  in  His  Name.  And  it  was  the  bond  of  thought 
that  existed,  even  unto  this  day,  among  those  who  are  true  to 
their   spirit. 

Q.  In  those  great  conditions,  was  it  usual  for  spirit  to 
use  an  etheric  body? 

A.  Yes,  it  was  not  until  about  the  5th  century  before  the 
coming  of  the  Master  that  spirit  laid  aside  the  use  of  etheric 
bodies. 

23 


Q.     Will  you  tell  us  why  they  did  it? 

A.  One  reason  was,  that  they  found  that  matter  was 
forcing  itself  too  close  into  physical  bodies;  or  in  other  words, 
it  was  working  too  rapidly  up  to  the  given  point  of  the  coming 
of  the  Divine  Master,  so  they  quit  using  etheric  bodies  so  much, 
although  there  were  those  among  the  Disciples  who  used  them. 
There  were  many  masters  of  the  far  East  who  used  them;  and 
those  who  were  the  Wise  men  used  them;  and  it  was  later  in 
the  great  period  when  the  battle  of  Bonaparte  was  fought  upon 
the  same  ground  that  at  present  is  being  waged  warfare,  that 
many  used  etheric  bodies.  But  the  century  that  is  opening  out 
will  find  many  master   spirits  using  etheric  bodies. 

Q.  Will  they  become  plain  enough  for  ordinary  people  to 
see  them? 

A.  No,  not  any  more  than  the  untrained  eye  of  those  who 
will  not  see,  those  who  submit  only  the  grosser  things  to  their 
view;  but  they  who  are  sensitized  watch  and  see  all  things. 

Q.     Marcus,  what  was  your  name  when  you  were  a  Scribe? 

A.  They  called  me  Efalenthia,  which  means,  just  like  you 
would  say  today  if  you  were  speaking  of  the  largest  animal — 
the  elephant — it  was  the  abbreviation,  because  they  marked  the 
moving  of  great  things.  And  the  King  called  me  the  Mover 
of  great  things.  All  knowledge  I  would  place  would  move  the 
greater  conditions. 

Q.     How  did  you  place  the  knowledge?    Upon  parchment? 

A.  No,  I  placed  it  upon  an  ivory  tablet.  They  were  pre- 
pared and  transferred  later  upon  a  composition  closely  resem- 
bling bronze,  but  the  most  of  it  was  placed  upon  stones.  Some 
of  the  stones  were  prepared  for  several  years  before  they  were 
ready  for  the  impressions.  Most  of  them  were  very  smooth. 
The  rough  ones  were  left  for  the  lower  bases  or  under  portions 
of  great  buildings,  and  many  of  them  even  as  far  as  20  and  30 
feet  under  ground  were  all  carved  before  they  were  placed 
there.     It  is  still  intact  so  it  can  be  read. 

The  most  beautiful  of  ivory  we  had,  of  course,  was  destroyed 
and  if  I  should  tell  you  of  hundreds  and  thousands  of  tusks  of 
Elephants  which  abounded  in  great  numbers,  you  would  be  sur- 
prised. Their  method  of  preparation  was  very  nice  and  it  was 
nothing  unusual  to  see  a  tower  50  or  100  feet  high  built  of  them, 

24 


they  were  beautifully  carved  and  you  could  not  see  where  the 
tusks  were  joined  together,  because  of  the  beautiful  carving. 
We  raised  elephants  just  as  you  raise  horses  and  cattle.  We 
used  them  very  greatly.  We  had  many  white  ones  which  be- 
longed to  the  royal  families,  but  there  was  one  particular  kind 
that  there  were  few  of,  and  they  were  a  creamy  color  with  black 
spots  upon  them — very  rare — and  used  only  by  the  King,  They 
were  very  large  and  very  beautiful. 


25 


LESSON  II 


Form,  Color,  Light  and  Grandeur 


MARCUS— February  7,  1918 

Well,  I  will  begin  as  I  always  do,  that  you  may  follow 
me  and  understand  the  placing  of  all  things. 

Egypt  was  at  the  height  of  her  greatness,  everything 
had  been  brought  that  there  might  be  placed  together  for 
all  the  glory  of  the  Pharaoh  had  been  intensified  and 
grandeur  was  everywhere.  This  condition  was  when 
Pharaoh  VIII  held  a  place  and  once  more  the  conscious- 
ness of  thy  spirit  must  come  in  touch  with  Egypt.  Every- 
thing that  thou  hath  a  knowledge  of  must  come  again 
to  you  that  you  may  realize  how  great  are  all  the  things 
that  are  created. 

This  time  Imhotep  followed  closely  with  thee  in  all 
things  that  thou  didst  do.  Even  yet,  however,  it  was 
needful  for  him  to  make  a  record  of  the  great  things  that 
they  might  be  placed  within,  not  only  the  reflected  sphere, 
but  within  the  Temple  of  Egypt  that  shall  some  day  be 
finished  wherein  it  is  placed. 

This  time  we  had  first  to  go  into  the  great  Color 
Universe  that  we  might  know  how  great  the  possibil- 
ities of  making  an  impression  upon  the  things  of  earth 
that  this  record  of  Egypt  should  be  held  for  ages.  From 
out  of  this  Universe  we  brought  with  us  a  master.  His 
name  was  Maluchia.  It  meant  to  us,  the  Master  of  all 
Color.    And  so  we  came  to  Egypt  when  seemingly  Egypt 

26 


far  greater  than  it  had  ever 
done  was  left  for  Imhotep  to 
.0  0  T  ar  of  us  took  an  etheric  body, 
vhom  we  went  among,  they 
it  we  were  not  as  other  men. 
•^  0  T  le  great  Temples,  visiting  the 
gs  that  were  of  Egypt.  We 
►riests  for  they  were  the  men 
c  lore  of  Egypt, 
came  to  us  from  the  King, 
wise  man  and  wonderful  con- 
far  into  the  magic  circle  of  the 
[  a  King  but  he  held  not  the 
own  spirit.  He  had  heard  of 
:hose  to  demand  of  us  an  audi- 
s  thou  always  art.  And  unto 
of  answering  his  invitation.  I 
lo  came  unto  us  and  I  spake 
"O  King,  thou  who  art  the 
seekest  thou  of  us?  We  are 
strangers  among  thy  people." 
id  then  he  answered :  "Surely 
otherhood  of  the  Seventh  Uni- 
r  hast  not  he  who  was  the  high 
e  Pharaoh  marked  thy  coming 
v^here  the  Seventh  Universe  is." 
nd  I  answered  him  and  said: 
1.  0  ^  P  0  0  T  ?reat  indeed  and  we  will  come 
and  give  thee  an  auaience,  but  it  must  not  be  within  the 
palace  of  the  Pharaohs,  for  we  cometh  not  into  thy  city 
that  we  should  either  seek  honor  or  place,  but  we  come 
that  we  may  bring  unto  they  who  shall  form  a  part  in 
the  great  future  of  Egypt,  bring  unto  them  a  knowledge 
that  is  great."  In  taking  this  unto  thee  there  cometh  to 
me  the  thought  fresh  as  it  was  at  that  time,  though  many 

27 


8  0.0  0 

9  2.0 

0 

8.0 

0 

8  0.0 

0 

7  I.O  0 

/  6.0 

0 

2  4.0 

0 

7   1.0 

0 

A  6.0 

0 

3  5.0 

0 

7  1.0 

0 

1   5.0 

0 

I   5.0 

0 

8  0.0 

0 

2  4.0 

0 

8  7.0 

0 

!   5.0 

0 

^  6.0 

0 

8  0.0 

0 

/»  6.0 

0 

3  2.0 

0  T 

have  been  the  things  that  have  passed  over  the  earth.  It 
was  close  onto  the  midnight  hour  and  we  four  went  alone 
and  passing  into  the  great  pyramid  we  were  received  by 
those  who  attended  upon  the  King,  but  when  we  entered 
the  great  chamber  there  was  no  one  present  save  the 
King  and  two  high  priests.  When  we  came  Pharaoh 
spake  to  us  and  gave  unto  us  the  signal  that  all  they  of 
Egypt  who  belongeth  unto  the  Brotherhood  hath  a 
knowledge  of.  Think  not  strange  as  thou  dost  listen  unto 
me  that  in  the  past  among  they  who  dwell  in  Egypt  that 
they  had  no  knowledge  of  all  these  things,  for  I  say  unto 
you  that  they  knew  more  than  what  has  been  known  by 
those  of  the  West  and  they  of  the  West  have  yet  to  learn 
of  many,  many  things. 

Pharaoh  was  a  man  who  was  large  of  stature  and 
with  keen  dark  eyes  and  swarthy  skin  and  the  long 
braids  of  black  hair  with  a  high  turban,  as  you  would 
speak  of  it,  or  head  dress,  added  to  his  height.  His  gar- 
ments were  very  rich  and  rare  on  this  occasion,  for  every 
strip  of  the  yellow  of  the  Egyptian  trappings  it  was  of 
rich  color,  while  the  black  and  the  red  gleamed  with  many 
silken  threads.  He  had  removed  the  outer  garment  and 
stood  clothed  in  pure  white  linen,  as  it  is  the  custom 
of  all  masters  within  the  pyramid  to  wear  no  color  unless 
it  be  a  head  dress.  His  hands  were  long  and  tapering 
and  upon  one  of  his  fingers  he  wore  the  Seal  of  Egypt. 
O,  Seal  of  Egypt,  it  is  that  which  hath  closed  the  silent 
lips  of  many  and  many  an  age. 

I  want  you  to  know  what  it  was  like  that  you  may  re- 
member and  understand  it  as  a  symbol. 

It  was  made  in  the  form  of  a  square  cross,  the  stone 
was  an  unfitted,  unpolished,  green  stone,  but  in  the  cen- 
ter, imbedded  within  it,  was  an  emerald  in  the  form  of 
a  scarab.  I  saw  it  gleamj  and  glisten  like  a  wonaerful 
eye,  and  then  I  saw  him  who  was  with  him,  one  of  the 

28 


high  priests,  come  and  speak  unto  him  and  say :  "Pharaoh, 
it  is  time  for  the  silent  prayer."  The  walls  of  the  room 
glowed  like  wondrous  sunlight  and  Pharaoh  knelt  close 
to  where  the  Circle  was  to  be,  and  we  stood  apart,  even 
we  claimed  not  the  right  to  kneel  with  the  King  of 
Egypt.  The  sunlight  on  the  walls  began  to  grow  dim  as 
if  the  quiet  stillness  was  forcing  a  reply,  and  at  least 
the  room  was  entirely  dark.  Pharaoh  finished  his  prayer 
and  I  wouldst  that  thou  shouldst  know  in  this  day  and 
age  what  his  prayer  was : 

"I,  Pharaoh  the  King,  call  upon  the  God  of  Egypt, 
and  upon  the  gods  of  all  forces  and  powers,  that  they 
may  bring  unto  me  that  which  I  demand.  And  may  the 
Gods  of  Egypt  hold  and  place  for  us,  as  a  people,  more 
grandeur,  more  power;  and  I,  Pharaoh  the  King,  say — 
More  TRUTH." 


Quietly  as  if  an  unseen  hand  had  swept  for  a  moment 
the  stillness  of  the  room,  and  then  the  magic  circle  began 
to  form.  It  was  as  if  a  soft  glow  was  melting  itself 
within  the  darkness  of  the  room.  It  was  about  three 
feet  wide,  the  light  of  it.  The  circumference  was  about 
twenty  feet. 

We  stood  close  to  the  southern  side  and  after  a  little 
while  Pharaoh  the  King,  with  his  two  priests,  came  and 
stood  with  us.  Then  it  was  that  Imhotep  spake  unto 
him.  "Pharaoh,"  he  said,  "knowest  thou  that  we  come 
from  the  great  Universe  of  the  Seventh?"  And  he  took 
from  out  his  mantle  a  tablet  of  fine  ivory,  and  he  said: 
"Pharaoh,  I  wouldst  read  unto  thee  a  word  from  one 
who  was  thine  ancestor."  Pharaoh  said  unto  him: 
"Bring  thou  me  a  message  from  the  land  of  Souls?" 
"Yea,  verily,"  Imhotep  said,  "for  they  who  have  passed 
into  the  land  of  Souls  some  of  them  waiteth  even  yet 

29 


that  they  shall  know  the  glory  of  our  Father."  "I  wouldst 
read  unto  thee,  Pharaoh,  a  message :  I,  Pharaoh,  sendeth 
unto  thee,  who  is  King  of  Egypt,  a  word  that  shall  be 
unto  thee  worthy  and  that  thou  shalt  use  it  with  thy 
counsellors."  "Prepare,"  I  say,  "thyself."  "The  River 
Nile  will  have  no  water  for  the  coming  harvest.  I  say 
unto  thee,  for  thy  people,  place  thou  for  them  great 
storehouses  of  grain,  for  there  will  be  need  of  it,  and 
place  more  than  thou  needest,  for  though  it  will  not  last 
but  the  year,  there  shall  be  those  who  shall  come  unto 
thee  for  grain,  even  in  the  far-off  country." 

The  King  of  Egypt  listened  to  the  message,  but  as  he 
turned  toward  the  magic  Circle  there  was  another  ques- 
tion, and  he  said :  "But  I  wouldst  that  thou  shouldst  give 
unto  me  from  out  of  the  Land  of  Souls  some  other 
thought.  The  Gods  have  blessed  me  and  Egypt  is  in  the 
height  of  her  glory,  but  Pharaoh,  the  King  of  Egypt,  hath 
known  no  love,  nor  nothing  given  unto  him."  I  saw  thee 
lift  thy  hand  as  if  there  should  be  a  silence,  and  thou 
didst  speak  unto  him  and  say :  "Pharaoh,  King  of  Egypt, 
knowest  thou  not  the  knowledge  of  spirit?"  And  as 
thou  didst  speak  unto  him,  the  master  from  the  Color 
Universe  lifted  his  hand  above  the  magic  ring  and  into 
its  heart  glowing  in  every  direction,  fell  the  holy  color; 
and  Pharaoh,  King  of  Egypt,  turning  toward  it,  said: 
"Surely  this  is  greater  than  I  have  ever  seen.  Egypt  hath 
many  colors  and  our  mantles  and  all  things  that  we  make 
are  rich  and  vivid  with  the  thought  we  place  within  them. 
Who  art  thou  that  bringest  this  that  I  may  see?"  But 
the  master  answered  him  not,  and  thou  silently,  waited  a 
moment,  and  then  said  thou  unto  Pharaoh:  "Pharaoh, 
knowest  thou  not  that  there  shall  be  a  time  when  all 
Egypt  shall  not  be  save  where  the  great  walls  have  been, 
but  thou  must  leave  upon  them  something  that  man  shall 
know  that  thou  hast  been."     He  looked,  and  across  his 

30 


face  fell  the  thought  that  this  master  came  to  him  that  he 
must  have  what  had  never  been  given  unto  him  before. 
"Imhotep,"  he  said,  "what  shall  I  do?  Thou  surely  hast 
it  written  as  thou  hast  the  other."  Imhotep  said :  "Pha- 
raoh, we  brought  unto  thee  a  master,  he  shall  place  upon 
the  stones  and  upon  the  great  court  yards  and  the  pillars, 
this  holy  light,  this  holy  color,  and  it  shall  cover  all  thy 
colors,  and  nothing  shall  remove  them.*  They  shall  last 
for  ages  and  ages  and  when  the  earth  seeketh  a  greater 
knowledge,  they  shall  be  there  to  tell  of  all  the  things  that 
Egypt  did.*' 

The  light  of  the  magic  circle  glowed  and  gleamed  and 
then  as  the  melodies  of  all  forces  seemed  to  blend  to- 
gether, there  stood  within  the  Circle  the  Pharaoh  that  had 
been  the  first.  How  wondrously  grand  he  was,  and  how 
strong  was  the  tie  that  was  between  us !  He  spake  not, 
the  silent  message  came  unto  us  without  words. 

Afterward  we  went  many  times  unto  the  King  and 
the  master  whom  we  had  brought  with  us,  placed  for  him 
the  knowledge  of  the  holy  color.  And  thou  who  knowest 
anything  of  Egypt  knowest  that  it  is  there,  those  won- 
drous colors,  even  though  the  winds  of  the  desert  and 
the  sands  have  blown  over  it  for  ages. 

Once  more  as  across  the  great  windswept  condition 
of  time,  thou  waitest  to  know  the  meaning  of  Egypt.  I 
say  unto  thee,  this  time  thou  didst  go  with  Heldos. 
Within  a  city  of  Egypt  there  was  a  quaint  old  building ;  in 
it  had  lived  for  ages  and  ages  they  who  were  known  as 
Greeks.  They  mingled  with  those  of  Egypt,  but  their 
women  and  their  men  were  always  Greek.  Unto  them 
came  those  of  Egypt  who  required  not  perfect  form  pro- 
duced as  far  as  culture  or  carving  were  concerned.     No 


♦Is  this  the  protection? 
Yes. 


31 


one  had  asked  from  whence  they  came  in  the  beginning, 
and  no  one  questioned,  for  they  had  been  there  a  long 
time.  Into  the  first  room  as  you  entered,  you  would  find 
many  works  in  the  old  pottery  of  Egypt ;  here  and  there 
would  be  a  wonderful  pillar  wrought  with  leaves  and 
wondrous  design  hiding  a  small  fountain  with  its  trailing 
vines  and  leaves  carved  upon  the  wonderful  porphyry  of 
Egrypt.  How  quaint  they  were,  and  yet  how  wondrously 
beautiful.  As  you  entered  only  one  person  was  there, 
and  she  was  a  woman.  Her  long  hair  fell  in  two  long 
braids  far  down  toward  her  feet ;  it  was  a  wondrous  color, 
dark  with  the  gleam  of  red  within  it,  showing  plainly 
above  the  fair  face,  for  Egypt  had  few  who  were  fair. 
Heldos  spoke  to  her  and  said:  "We  have  come  to  see 
what  you  can  do  for  us."  And  she  invited  you  into  the 
work-room.  Back  of  it  was  a  large  room  entirely  made 
of  crystal,  which,  as  you  know,  was  used  in  Egypt  instead 
of  glass.  Many  were  the  wonderful  works  of  art  within 
it;  even  from  far-off  Italy  had  been  sent  to  Egypt  the 
wondrous  marble  upon  which  this  woman  had  carved  and 
formed.  Heldos,  taking  her  mantle  from  around  her,  laid 
it  aside  and  then  the  woman  said  to  her:  "Thou  hast 
come  to  me  because  I  have  need  of  thee."  How  grand 
and  sweet  the  light  fell  over  all  things.  Outside  the  burn- 
ing sun  of  Egypt  shone,  but  within  this  quiet  place  it  was 
mellowed  and  the  quartz  shone  forth  with  many  color- 
ings falling  upon  the  forms  everywhere.  Heldos  did  not 
seem  to  feel  or  think  of  this  answer  in  a  strange  way,  for 
she  said :  "Certainly,  my  child,  I  am  ready  for  what  thou 
hast  for  me  to  do."  She  took  her  into  a  small  room  and 
there  she  strapped  upon  her  form  that  which  she  wished 
for  her  to  have.  It  was  a  long,  loose  robe  of  thin  mate- 
rial which  showed  the  form  perfectly  thru  its  folds.  She 
had  removed  the  sandals  from  her  feet  and  the  feet  were 
bare.    She  had  loosened  the  hair;  it  fell  like  a  wondrous 

32 


shower  to  the  floor.  She  asked  her  would  she  stand  a 
moment  until  she  had  arranged  what  she  would  use. 
Back  of  her  fell  the  royal  curtain  of  the  great  House  of 
Egypt,  and  crouching  at  her  feet  was  a  white  leopard 
with  only  here  and  there  a  tawny  spot  upon  its  fur. 
Whence  had  it  come?  It  belonged  there  and  was  a  pet 
of  the  woman.  She  rolled  her  piece  of  rough  marble  up 
to  the  point  where  she  required  to  work  upon  and  then 
she  placed  Heldos.  Thou  hast  told  me  of  it  many  times. 
Over  and  above  the  hair  was  a  circlet  of  fine  gold  and  in 
the  front  of  it  were  three  brilliant  stars.  The  woman 
worked  rapidly  as  if  she  must  needs  hurry.  How  long 
was  it?  Thou  didst  not  count  the  hours,  thou  wert  busy 
watching.  The  woman  worked  on.  The  great  rough 
piece  of  marble  formed  itself  gradually  and  when  the 
light  was  almost  gone,  she  said  to  Heldos :  "Wouldst 
thou  come  again?  Come  thou  to  me  when  the  twilight 
light  of  the  morrow  is."  And  again  Heldos  and  thou 
didst  go  and  when  it  was  finished,  it  was  placed  within 
the  great  Temple  of  Hathor,  and  Egypt  had  a  perfect 
form.* 

Marcus  wears  a  rough  linen  (brown)  robe,  which  has 
the  skirt  of  the  Roman  and  the  wrappings  of  the  Roman. 
On  his  head  is  a  wreath  of  brown  leaves.  Why  do  you 
bring  this?  Because  I  have  to  tell  and  bring  together  the 
thought  that  belongeth  only  to  those  who  understand 
both  poetry  and  art.     Write,  he  says,  lest  I  should  not 


*Would  you  explain  the  Temple  of  Hathor,  and  whose  per- 
fect form  was  this? 

The  Temple  of  Hathor,  where  they  worshipped  the  God 
Hathor. 

The  perfect  form  was  the  symbol  of  what  was  to  be,  which 
was  the  promise  to  the  Hitites,  Mona  the  mother  of  the  Divine 
Master. 

33 


hold  long  enough  that  thou  shouldst  know  how  perfect 
it  is  as  I  bring  it  unto  thee. 

How  long  did  Egypt  wait  for  light?  Long  enough 
that  there  should  be  brought  from  out  of  the  heights  the 
knowledge  that  penetrates  and  holds  itself  ready  for  a 
race  that  can  place  knowledge  in  the  highest  degree  pos- 
sible for  earth. 

Unity  and  the  knowledge  of  greater  things  had  swept 
over  the  creations  of  the  Father.  One  by  one  had  the 
Brotherhoods  formed  themselves  that  the  link  might  be 
complete.  The  great  master  of  the  Holy  Places  stood 
waiting  as  if  for  a  message.  The  soft  glow  of  the  eternal 
harmonies  had  mingled  with  all  things  and  we  of  the 
Brotherhood  of  the  Seventh  Universe  knew  that  we  were 
to  fulfill  our  part  whatever  it  might  be — the  command 
given.  We  watched  and  waited  and  as  the  cloud  of  holy 
breath  separated,  there  came  forth  a  light,  brilliant,  yet 
soft,  vitalizing,  yet  pure.  The  holy  master  said :  "They 
of  the  Seventh  Universe  must  carry  this  to  earth  for  there 
will  be  a  race  whose  first  king  shall  be  of  spirit  and  whose 
last  king  shall  hold  the  knowledge  of  silence.  The  seal 
was  given  unto  us  wherein  was  placed  the  light,  and  we 
— Imhotep  and  you  and  I — were  given  the  right  to  bring 
it  to  the  earth.  Earth  was  not  in  darkness,  neither  was  it 
surrounded  by  shadows,  and  yet  we  brought  this  which 
glowed  and  burned  within  the  casket  and  we  knew  that  it 
was  holy.  Unto  he  who  was  the  spirit  and  the  first  King 
of  Egypt,  represents  as  a  symbol  the  Spirit  of  Knowledge, 
unto  him  we  gave  this :  he  placed  it  within  the  earth  and 
it  hath  remained  there.  Once  in  a  while  there  cometh 
one  in  some  age  who  saith :  "I  have  found  that  which  is 
the  pure  light"  and  then  it  cannot  be  used.  And  again 
the  ages  rolled  on.  Thou  and  I  knew  what  it  was — it 
was  the  vitality  of  human  life.  But  we  knew  that  the 
Father  when  He  gave  it  unto  us,  required  of  the  holy 

34 


master  that  we  say  unto  the  King:  "As  thou  tellest  in 
spirit,  O  King,  thou  must  place  this  within  the  earth,  for 
human  life  must  not  be  renewed,  human  life  must  be  MY 
gift  in  the  future."  So  we  brought  light  unto  Egypt,  but 
it  remaineth  as  yet  within  the  earth,  for  no  man  knoweth 
where  it  is.* 

I  will  now  say  unto  thee  for  yet  a  little  while  some- 
thing that  will  belong  to  this.  I  have  said  unto  thee  I 
would  tell  thee  of  the  grandeur  of  Egypt. 

The  long,  low  slanting  rays  of  the  sun  fell  over  the 
desert  sands,  from  every  direction  came  long  trains  oi 
camels  bearing  their  burden  toward  the  city  of  the  great 
King,  for  had  it  not  gone  forth  into  every  land,  that  the 
King  was  to  place  a  Queen  upon  the  throne.  He  was 
one  of  the  Pharaohs  of  the  last  condition.  And  she  who 
was  to  rule  with  him  was  his  sister.  Very  great,  indeed, 
was  the  demand  made  upon  every  country,  all  the  richest 
stuffs,  the  finest  jewels,  the  greatest  quantities  of  gold 
and  silver  for  months  had  they  been  preparing  and  the 
trains  of  camels  came  from  every  direction. 

In  a  wondrous  room  whose  hangings  were  most  beau- 
tiful a  man  and  a  woman  stood.  They  were  very  much 
alike,  save  that  she  was  the  taller  of  the  two.  She  spake 
to  him  in  a  low  quiet  voice  in  the  language  of  Egypt. 
vShe  said :  "Surely  thou  dost  not  want  me  to  be  a  queen, 
thou  knowest  I  love  another  man  and  thou  art  my  brother. 
Thou  knowest  I  have  pledged  my  troth  to  him.  Why 
wouldst  thou  have  me  for  a  queen?"  "Requig,"  he  said, 
and  his  voice  was  even  sweeter  than  her  own,  "knowest 
thou  not  that  the  Gods  have  said  that  I  die  ere  the  third 
hour  of  the  great  rule  commences?"     She  laughed  a  little 


*Is  this  the  light  that  the  Holy  Master  will  use  in  bringing 


peace 


Yes. 

35 


and  answered  him  not.  Once  more  he  spake :  "Requig, 
who  but  thou  could  rule  Egypt,  and  when  I  am  gone 
knowest  thou  not  that  thou  canst  choose  whom  thou  dost 
please  to  choose?  But  ere  I  go,  I  wouldst  that  he  who 
is  my  heir  shall  rule  when  thou  hast  finished  thy  reign." 
She  stepped  to  where  one  of  the  curtains  concealed  a  seat, 
and  taking  from  off  the  seat  a  small  copper  tube  that  had 
been  used  to  roll  a  manuscript  around,  she  broke  it  in 
twain,  and  laughing,  she  said :  "Surely  thou  art  not 
feeling  that  this  is  true?  Thou  canst  reign  and  reign  long 
and  wisely.  Go  choose  thou  the  Seti ;  of  all  his  daughters 
there  is  none  greater  than  she  he  has  named  for  himself. 
Knowest  thou  that  he  has  no  son  and  he  would  be  glad, 
indeed,  if  thou  shouldst  take  his  daughter."  "Requig, 
knowest  thou  not  that  she  is  cold,  she  hath  no  gentleness 
for  Egypt;  surely  thou  knowest  my  word  and  tomorrow 
thou  must  be  called  the  Queen  of  Egypt." 

Over  her  face  swept  a  look  of  pain  and  she  said  :  "My 
brother,  surely  thou  shouldst  not  do  this.  As  far  back 
as  our  people  are  concerned,  knowest  thou  not  they  have 
never  done  this  thing  that  thou  saith  that  thou  wilt  do  ?" 
The  morning  came  and  all  the  city  was  awake  with 
the  glory  of  the  day.  From  every  direction  came  they 
who  wore  huge  garlands  of  flowers,  all  the  camels  were 
burdened,  it  seemed  as  if  the  wealth  of  the  great  foliage 
kingdom  had  burst  forth ;  even  the  streets  were  laid  with 
flowers.  Outside  the  gates  of  the  city  great  crowds  were 
coming  in.  The  sound  of  the  low  piping  reed  was  heard 
everywhere,  and  the  plaintive  music  of  voices  seemed  like 
a  wondrous  melody  of  thought.  At  last  the  great  Temple 
gates  were  opened  and  the  sound  of  .  Egypt's  voices 
blended  with  the  voices  outside.  The  Temple  was  filled 
full,  the  steps  were  filled  and  the  streets  were  filled,  and 
over  it  all  fell  still  the  plaintive  notes  of  the  reed  music. 
Within  the  Temple  the  great  burning  incense  burned  with 

36 


a  smothering  smoke,  and  the  perfume  of  the  flowers  min- 
gled with  it  all;  and  over  the  High  Altar  was  thrown  a 
thin,  white,  silken  veil ;  at  the  bottom  of  it  was  a  heavy- 
trimming  of  silver.  All  around  and  about  it  was  spread 
white  heavy  fur  rugs,  deadening  the  sound  of  those  who 
were  standing  there.  Eighteen  priests  with  the  great 
high  tower  or  cope  of  silver  upon  their  heads,  passed  and 
formed  a  circle — back  of  the  altar.  Eighteen  more  with 
the  signets  of  the  King  of  Egypt  formed  the  other  half 
circle  outside  at  the  foot  of  the  altar.  Twenty-one  maid- 
ens in  silver  and  white  clustered  at  the  foot  of  it;  and 
last  of  all  came  the  King  and  his  sister.  The  low,  sweet 
tones  of  the  piping  grew  shriller  and  shriller,  and  the 
voice  of  the  High  Priest  chanted  forth  the  low  chant  that 
seemed  to  fill  all  the  Temple.  They  knelt,  those  two, 
before  the  Altar,  and  the  veil  of  the  altar  fell  in  its  shim- 
mering folds,  revealing  what  was  beneath  it.  At  the  top 
was  the  wondrous  light  and  form  and  the  wondrous  eye 
that  belongeth  unto  the  House  of  Egypt.  It  glowed  and 
burned  and  seemed  to  penetrate  as  its  gaze  fell  every- 
where. At  the  bottom  of  it,  moving  rapidly,  as  if  here 
and  there  it  had  been  touched  and  illumined,  flashed  back 
and  forth  the  vivid  letterings  in  Egypt :  *T  proclaim  thee 
Queen."  They  knelt  there  a  long  time,  those  two,  until 
all  the  rest  had  left  the  Temple,  and  then  he  led  her  forth, 
and  upon  the  steps  of  the  great  Temple  he  proclaimed  her 
Queen  of  Egypt.  Everywhere  the  beauty  and  the  grand- 
eur and  the  feasting  were  beyond  all  that  earth  had  ever 
held  before.  And  when  the  night  shadows  fell  he  came 
and  spoke  to  her  before  they  were  to  go  in  to  the  feast. 
"Requig,*'  he  said,  "when  thy  son  is  born  unto  thee  thou 
shalt  search  for  a  name  and  I  would  say  unto  thee  that 
thou  shalt  call  him  Tmhotep'  in  memory  of  Imhotep  the 
Great.'' 

And  unto  Egypt  was  given  the  grandeur  of  a  new  day. 

37 


LESSON  III 


A  Knowledge  of  Egypt,  beginning  at  the  great 
Pyramid,  which  represents  the  Father 

MARCUS— December  6,  1917 

Thou  knoweth  we  came  from  the  Seventh  Universe 
and  thou  knoweth  we  held  a  knowledge  within  the  cre- 
ative cycle  from  whence  we  came,  and  we  stood  within 
the  great  conditions  when  immensity  of  form  first  held  its 
place  within  the  earth.  And  thou  didst  come  with  Imho- 
tep  the  Great,  and  thou  didst  stand:  and  each  of  us 
washed  our  feet  within  the  great  movement  of  the  waters 
of  earth.  Thou  and  I  were  spirit,  and  Imhotep  took  an 
etheric  body,  and  we  went  among  that  which  was  seek- 
ing immense  form  to  eventually  become  sufficient  to  re- 
ceive infinite  spirit  close  enough  within  it  to  do  what 
was  needful.  And  in  the  great  conditions  where  the 
first  knowledge  was  placed,  we  will  call  them  Philistines, 
because  no  other  name  hath  been  given  them.  And 
Imhotep  said:  "If  thou  wilt  go  unto  the  Seventh  Uni- 
verse I  will  hold  my  place  and  I  will  lay  the  stones  of 
the  foundation  for  that  which  shall  worship  the  Father." 
And  he  gathered  together  from  out  of  Immensity  the 
knowledge  of  forces,  and  thou  dost  call  it  at  this  time 
"electricity,"  while  he  gave  no  name  unto  it.  And  long 
afterwards  when  thou  didst  come  again,  thou  didst  see 

38 


that  he  had  laid  eighteen  (18)  stones,  and  he  waited  that 
thou  mightest  come,  that  we  three  should  lay  three  (3) 
more  stones,  which  made  three  sides  of  the  Pyramid — 
twenty-one — making  the  symbol  of  the  mystic  numbers. 

Thou  canst  not  understand  only  as  I  tell  it  unto  thee, 
for  they  who  quarried  the  stone,  were  large,  they  would 
make  four  men  today.  And  they  were  strong,  for  they 
had  no  separation  to  make.  And  they  took  the  stones 
from  out  the  mountain  and  three  (3)  stones  were  dark 
and  four  (4)  stones  were  light,  and  the  light  stones 
needed  no  quarrying,  for  the  Father  had  placed  them  in 
the  beginning.  And  the  three  (3)  dark  stones  were  cut, 
but  they  were  cut  with  the  forces,  not  with  human  hands. 
And  when  they  were  ready  to  be  placed  they  were  moved 
by  the  power  that  you  moveth  other  things  with,  but 
you  hold  it  subject  to  the  small  conditions:  while  they 
held  it  subject  to  the  large  condition.  They  could  handle 
it,  but  you  cannot. 

Then  he  waited  four  thousand  (4000)  years,  and  upon 
the  twenty-one  (21)  stones  he  placed  twenty-one  (21) 
more,  and  he  made  three  (3)  tiers.  Then  he  waited  one 
hundred  (100)  years,  and  from  out  of  every  Universe 
came  a  master,  and  they  brought  with  them  a  stone,  and 
when  thou  knoweth  the  numberings  of  the  Universes, 
thou  wilt  know  the  number  of  the  stones  within  the  great 
Pyramid.  And  they  finished  it  to  the  last  point  at  the 
top. 

Then  came  he  who  was  the  Holy  Master,  and  he  said : 
"It  shall  mark  the  movement  of  the  North  Star  and  no 
man  in  no  age  of  the  earth  shall  be  able  to  calculate  like 
unto  it." 

Then  thou  knoweth  that  your  time  of  earth  moved  on. 
Long,  long  it  was.  And  Imhotep  went  into  other  places 
and  he  lived  and  moved  like  unto  as  thou  hast  done.  And 
he  had  many  experiences  as  thou  hast  had  of  earth,  but 

39 


he  builded  no  more,  but  when  the  third  habitation  began 
and  from  out  of  the  residue  that  remaineth  between  the 
two,  there  came  they  whose  knowledge  was  equal  to  his 
own.  Then  thou  knoweth  that  once  more  within  the 
last  predynastic  condition  of  Egypt,  not  as  thou  knoweth 
it,  but  as  it  was,  Imhotep  came  once  more,  and  thou  didst 
bring  with  thee  one  black  stone  from  out  of  the  Universe 
of  the  Seventh,  and  upon  it  thou  didst  place  the  markings 
of  thy  mastership  and  thou  didst  give  it  unto  Imhotep 
and  it  had  seven  comers,  and  he  did  place  it  and  it  was 
known  throughout  all  Egypt  that  there  should  be  seven 
pyramids  built,  and  they  took  for  their  builder  one  who 
came  from  out  of  that  which  had  been  left  between  the 
second  and  third  habitations,  and  he  builded  there  seven 
great  pyramids,  and  they  were  built  for  those  who  are  to 
be  known  as  thou  knowest.  One  was  to  the  Son — one 
to  the  Holy  Spirit — one  to  the  God  of  the  Universe — 
one  to  the  Most  High  God — one  to  the  Holy  Master — 
and  one  to  the  great  condition  that  will  be.  And  they 
were  around  and  about  the  first  one  that  had  been 
builded.  And  when  thou  thinkest  thou  shalt  know  that 
each  one  took  its  point  from  the  North  Star,  and  thou 
shalt  know  the  meaning  of  the  Master  Star,  for  the  first 
one  standeth  close  to  the  first  Pyramid.  (Do  you  mean 
in  close  proximity  ?  No,  to  you  it  would  be  a  large  area, 
but  to  us  it  is  not  large.) 

Thinkest  thou  not  that  this  is  physical  all  of  it ;  there 
is  physical  and  there  is  spiritual,  one  within  the  other; 
and  remember,  no  man  can  make  the  calculation. 

(We  do  not,  physically,  know  of  these  pyramids  to- 
day?) No  sir,  because  they  are  not  there.  There  are 
remnants  of  some  and  the  remnants  of  the  oldest  one  is 
young  by  the  side  of  the  others. 

(Those  three  that  are  in  a  row,  do  they  belong  to- 
gether?)    Yes  sir,  did  I  not  tell  you  that  three  were 

40 


dark  and  four  were  light?  Three  so  we  can  see  them — 
that  belongs  to  earth  ?    Yes  sir. 

And  thou  shalt  know  that  as  twenty-one  marketh  the 
knowledge  of  the  Mystic  Brotherhood,  there  were,  when 
finally  complete,  twenty-one  markings  upon  the  stones 
within  the  Pyramid ;  but  upon  the  four  stones  of  the 
Pyramid  there  were  no  markings. 

Then  thou  didst  seek  out  thy  way  and  did  come  to 
the  old  predynastic  Egypt  for  thou  wished  to  place  a 
knowledge  of  the  symbols  and  even  into  the  later  knowl- 
edge of  Egypt  hath  come  the  markings  of  the  cartouches 
like  unto  the  seven  cornered  stone  that  thou  didst  bring 
from  out  the  Seventh  Universe. 


I  will  continue  from  time  to  time  giving  you  a  close 
and  vivid  description  of  many  experiences.  The  begin- 
ning of  the  record,  who  first  made  it,  why  it  was  placed 
upon  stones,  why  it  was  colored.  Many  incidents  in 
the  lives  of  the  ruling  Kings  that  history  does  not 
give.  I  will  call  them  by  names  for  you,  that  you  may 
be  able  to  understand  it.  I  will  not  place  any  dates,  for 
many  times  one  incident  will  be  connected  closely  with 
the  other,  while  there  may  be  intervals  of  thousands  of 
years  between  others.  I  also  will  have  to  connect  for 
you  very  closely  the  experience  of  spirit,  not  connected 
with  earthly  experiences,  and  this  will  form  much  of  the 
knowledge  that  you  must  place  within  the  spiritual  Tem- 
ple. Particularly  I  wish  you  to  know  the  beginning  of 
the  Pharaohs.  How  many  Imhoteps  there  were;  what 
they  did,  why  warfare  was  begun ;  who  were  the  females 
who  had  much  to  do  with  the  ruling  of  their  nations — 
why  they  understood  the  knowledge  of  the  soul.  Why 
they  claimed  the  right  to  the  Land  of  Souls.  Each  and 
all  of  these  must  follow  one  after  the  other. 

41 


Bring  this  with  you  that  we  may  make  it  a  perfect 
history  for  you. 

I  also  will  carry  it  down  for  you  to  the  last  great  con- 
dition and  form  the  corresponding  symbol  and  the  mean- 
ing of  the  conditions  then  and  the  conditions  now.  I  will 
try  and  make  it  as  plain  as  I  can  that  should  you  have 
occasion  to  have  it  placed  before  others,  there  will  be  no 
misunderstanding,  but  it  must  be  simple  enough  that  all 
will  know  my  meaning. 

Have  I  not  told  you  that  they  who  belonged  to  the 
Brotherhood  would  from  time  to  time,  place  for  you  the 
knowledge  of  many  things.  Theodeous  (Mr.  Hare)  forms 
the  link  between  the  second  and  the  third  habitations,  and 
he  was  the  master  who  laid  the  remaining  stones  for  the 
other  pyramids. 

Do  you  not  know  that  I  told  you  that  the  stone  at 
Constantinople  was  a  black  stone  with  the  white  mark- 
ings? Was  that  black  stone  brought  from  the  Seventh 
Universe?  Yes  sir.  There  is  an  image  of  the  Master 
carved  from  black  stone  underneath  the  old  Roman  forum 
at  this  time. 

Who  builded  the  Roman  Temple  at  the  place  where 
the  Master  was  baptized  ?  I  had  much  to  do  with  it.  It 
was  builded  twelve  years  before  He  came  to  Jerusalem. 
It  was  builded  under  the  directions  of  Linnius  Aquinous 
(not  the  Linnius,  the  Governor).  He  belonged  to  the 
old  Quintal  family.  He  discovered  the  River  and  wished 
to  build  a  Temple  to  Jupiter  on  this  spot.  I  (Marcus) 
builded  all  of  the  pillars,  then  I  was  called  away  into 
another  part  that  I  might  lay  the  foundation  for  the  old 
Temple  far  to  the  South.  I  did  not  see  it  after  it  was 
finished. 

This  history  of  Egypt  which  I  shall  give  you  will  take 
twelve  lessons  (once  a  month).  There  must  be  other 
things  to  lead  up  to  the  understanding  of  what  I  give — 

42 


which  will  come  in  the  intervening  lessons.  There  must 
be  four  nations  into  which  we  must  go  in  order  to  make 
this  complete,  and  I  will  endeavor  to  place  a  knowledge 
of  them  between  these  lessons,  that  this  will  be  better 
understood. 

Does  the  Vatican  hold  a  knowledge  of  this  Temple 
where  the  Divine  Master  was  baptized?  Yes.  The  rea- 
son it  has  never  been  given  was  because  Rome,  as  a 
people  at  the  time  of  the  coming  of  the  Master,  was 
ready  to  turn  toward  the  knowledge  of  the  One  God,  just 
as  the  world  today  stands  ready.     Knowest  thou? 


43 


LESSON    IV 


MARCUS— June  6,  1918 

I  want  to  begin  and  take  up  for  you  the  line  of  con- 
nection between  the  Babylon  of  the  second  habitation  and 
the  Egypt  of  the  third.     And  I  may  put  it  in  this  way. 

Within  the  Seventh  Universe  the  masters  felt  as  if  the 
message  would  come  to  them,  so  they  made  their  prepa- 
ration that  they  might  fulfill  it,  for  they  knew  it  came 
from  He  who  giveth  them  the  highest  thought.  Of  the 
number  who  gathered  together  there  were  nine,  and 
five  were  given  the  right  to  take  unto  the  second  habita- 
tion the  producing  and  putting  together  of  the  great  city 
that  was  to  be  known  as  Babylon. 

Egypt  of  the  third  habitation  held  a  Babylon  that  was 
similar  but  not  equal.     Let  me  tell  it  in  my  way. 

It  was  needful  that  it  should  be  known,  and  among 
they  to  whom  it  was  to  be  given,  was  one  who  will  be 
known,  as  far  as  this  history  is  concerned,  as  Henaman. 
He  gathered  together  the  great  forces  that  belonged  in 
all  of  the  Seventh  Universe  and  unto  the  second  habita- 
tion brought  he  that  which  produced  the  substance 
whereby  Babylon  was  to  be  built.  Then  the  question 
was  brought  forward  among  they  of  the  Seventh  Uni- 
verse as  to  how  far  they  would  go  in  this  work,  and  they 
took  from  out  of  the  knowledge  of  the  Philistines  and 
placed  it  in  form  within  the  universe  that  is  bounded  by 
the  Belt  of  Orion  on  one  side,  the  great  land  of  the 

44 


Philistines  on  the  other  and  the  North  Star  on  the  other. 
In  thy  questioning  thou  hast  never  asked  me  the  mean- 
ing of  the  North  Star  to  the  Seventh  Universe,  and  I  v^ill 
tell  you  it  in  this  way. 

For  us  of  the  Seventh  Universe  everything  hath  three 
sides,  which  represent  the  triangle,  or  the  law  of  obe- 
dience. In  this  we  took  the  Belt  of  Orion  for  one  side ; 
we  took  the  North  Star  for  the  other,  and  we  finished  it 
according  to  the  knowledge,  according  to  the  knowledge 
for  the  other  side.  This  gave  us  the  formation  by  which 
and  thru  which  the  great  land  of  Babylon  was  to  be 
divided  and  we  went  unto  the  great  country  and  Hena- 
man  came  with  us  for  he  was  of  the  Philistines  and  he 
said  unto  us:  "And  there  shall  be  great  form,  first, 
before  it  shall  be  divided."*  And  you  took  that  point 
which  was  toward  the  North  Star,  I  took  the  other  point, 
and  the  other  master  of  the  Seventh  Universe  took  the 
other,  and  we  shall  give  him  the  name  of  Philimon  be- 
cause he  was  plain  and  he  gathered  together  the  four 
winds  of  the  earth. f  And  when  it  was  ready,  to  the 
north  the  boundary  line  was  of  they  who  came  and 
brought  in  the  races  of  the  Atlanteans;  and  to  the  south 
side  came  they  who  were  of  the  races  of  the  Chaldeans; 
and  to  the  east  side  they  brought  in  the  races  of  the 
Dandoes;t  and  in  the  north  they  left  it  plain  for  the 
great  city  to  be  builded  and  within  it,  this  great  city, 
they  placed  that  which  afterward  was  the  city  within 


*Did  the  land  of  the  earth  represent  the  land  of  the  Philis- 
tines before  it  was  divided? 
Yes. 

tWhat  are  the  four  winds? 

The  four  great  forces  that  the  7th  Universe  gave  the  earth. 
That  holds  for  you  the  four  unknown  laws. 

$And  is  the  west  left  for  the  new  race  to  come  in? 
Yes. 

45 


Egypt — the  great  old  city  which  was  known  as  the  first 
Heliopolis.  And  we  brought  from  out  of  the  Seventh 
Universe  they  who  were  master  builders  and  they  who 
cut  stone  and  they  who  could  mold  and  carve,  and  when 
all  was  complete,  the  races  on  the  three  sides  came  within 
and  dwelt  there  according  to  the  law.  And  from  among 
they  who  were  for  the  center,  which  was  Egypt,  they 
chose  a  king,  and  his  name  was  Therigahd.  And  he  held 
what  was  known  as  three  reigns  (reins)  one  for  each  side. 
And  then  it  came  about  toward  the  end  of  the  second 
habitation  and  there  was  a  new  king  who  reigned  in  the 
place  of  the  fathers  that  had  been  before  him  and  very 
mighty  and  great  was  this  city  of  Babylon.  And  they 
worshipped  great  images  which  they  made,  and  fine  was 
the  workmanship  thereof.  But  at  the  beginning  of  the 
last  year  of  the  reign  of  this  king,  according  to  the  annals 
given,  there  came  unto  him  one  day  a  tribe  of  people, 
small  in  number,  and  they  called  themselves  Jheusus 
and  they  were  uncivilized  yet  still  disciplined  and  among 
them  was  a  woman.*  And  one  said :  "Go  unto  the  king 
and  say  unto  this  king  that  we  come  to  destroy  Babylon." 
And  the  word  was  brought  to  the  king  of  this  strange 
people,  and  the  king  said :  "I  know  them  not.  Whither 
hast  they  come?"  And  the  one  who  brought  him  word 
said:  "It  is  well  for  thee,  O  king,  that  thou  shouldst 
see  them."  And  you  and  I  waited,  for  unto  us  was 
given  the  care  of  this  great  city.  And  the  king  went 
and  gave  audience  unto  they  who  came  and  they  had 
the  woman  with  them,  for  she  was  their  prophetess,  and 
they  said  unto  the  king,  "We  come  to  destroy  thy  city 
and  to  scatter  thy  people  away  from  the  land."  And 
the  king  said  unto  them:    "I  cannot  give  you  either  the 


♦Did  these  uncivilized  represent  the  Jesus  principle? 
Yet. 

46 


city  or  the  land."  And  they  pushed  the  woman  forward 
and  she  spake  unto  the  king  in  another  tongue  and  you 
and  I  came  close  to  listen  and  she  said  unto  the  king: 
"O  king  of  Babylon,  these  people  they  carry  long  rods 
and  upon  the  rods  is  that  which  bringeth  fire ;  and  they 
also  send  rods  that  hath  poison  that  causeth  death,  and 
they  have  small  bags  into  which  they  have  pressed  a 
poison  that  is  like  smoke.  But  fear  not,  O  king,  I  bring- 
eth thee  word  that  thou  shalt  not  have  battle  with  them." 
And  one  of  their  number  stepped  forth,  not  knowing 
what  she  had  said,  and  thou  didst  say  to  the  king: 
"Remember  that  they  of  the  Seventh  Universe  builded 
thy  temple  and  from  out  of  the  gateway  of  the  North 
Star  will  come  that  which  shall  hold  thee  against  the 
men." 

And  these  people  went  away,  but  they  left  the  woman, 
and  the  king  said :  "Take  her  among  the  servants  and 
give  her  food  and  drink."  But  when  she  had  washed 
her  face  and  her  hands  and  her  hair,  one  of  the  old  serv- 
ants of  the  king  saw  she  was  fair  and  he  went  unto  the 
king  and  he  said:  "O  king,  thou  canst  not  leave  the- 
woman  among  the  servants,  for  she  is  fair  to  look  upon 
and  I  know  that  she  is  different  from  others."  And 
the  king  said  unto  him :  "Send  her  to  me."  And  the 
servant  said:  "How  knowest  I,  master,  that  she  will 
come  unto  thee?"  And  he  took  from  off  of  his  arm 
according  as  I  spake  unto  him,  and  it  was  a  brown  bronze 
circle,  and  it  had  within  it  two  green  stones  and  two  red 
stones.  And  he  said  unto  the  servant:  "Give  this  unto 
the  woman  and  say  unto  her  that  the  king  giveth  her 
protection  as  it  is  given  unto  me  from  they  who  cometh 
and  abideth  with  me  from  the  Seventh  Universe."  And 
when  she  had  clothed  herself  and  washed  her  hair,  it  was 
not  dark,  it  was  yellow  and  her  skin  was  white.  And 
she  placed  around  herself  a  mantle  that  she  had  with  her 

47 


and  she  came  unto  the  king  and  she  said  unto  him: 
"What  wouldst  thou  have  of  me?"  And  he  said :  "Seeth 
thou  they  who  are  of  the  Seventh  Universe?"  And  she 
answered  and  said:  "Yea  verily,  king,  I  knowest  for  I 
dwelt  with  them  within  the  land  of  Egypt,  the  Egypt 
that  thou  knowest  of."  Then  she  lifted  her  hand  and 
said :  "O  king,  I  cometh  to  thee  with  a  message  and  it  is 
of  Egypt,"  and  when  she  opened  her  mantle  the  inner 
portion  was  covered  with  symbols  woven  in  the  silk  like 
unto  the  writings  of  Egypt.  And  thou  didst  come  unto 
her  and  thou  didst  say :  "Opha,  why  cometh  thou  from 
the  Sixth  Universe?  Is  it  time?"  And  she  said  unto 
thee :  "Yea  verily,  and  Egypt  hath  sent  me  to  bring  unto 
Babylon  the  message  from  the  King  unto  the  king." 
And  we  did  listen  unto  her  and  she  gave  her  message  and 
she  said :  "O  king,  He  who  is  the  Son  of  the  Father 
will  come  in  the  third  hour  and  He  shall  be  King  of  the 
earth.  Knowest  thou  not  that  the  earth  hath  more  land 
than  water  and  it  must  have  more  water  than  land;  for 
water  is  knowledge,  and  thou  art  close  to  the  center  of 
the  earth  and  He  will  cleft  the  earth  and  divide  it  into 
four  portions  and  then  there  shall  be  more  water  than 
there  is  land."  And  then  she  said  unto  the  king :  "Thou 
shalt  make  ready."  And  we  went  into  the  Temple  and 
the  king  called  his  servants  and  they  took  down  the 
image  of  stone  and  of  brass  and  of  wood  and  the  places 
wherein  it  stood  there  came  a  light.  Then  we  waited 
and  the  king  waited  with  us  and  he  took  his  crown  from 
off  his  head  and  he  laid  it  down  and  thou  and  I  removed 
our  mantles.  And  the  temple  was  filled  with  something 
like  a  cloud  which  grew  smaller  and  smaller ;  after  a  while 
into  it  came  the  form  of  He  who  is  the  Master.  And 
the  king  said  unto  Him :  "I  would  give  thee  my  crown." 
And  He  answered  and  said:  "I  needeth  not  a  crown. 
My  Father  giveth  Me  a  glory  and  a  holiness."     And  he 

48 


lifted  his  hands  and  we  saw  where  He  cleft  the  earth 
and  out  of  it  came  another  cloud  and  there  was  a  breath 
of  the  incense  not  like  the  temple  had  had  before.  And  He 
said  unto  us:  "Seeth  thou  this  is  the  consciousness  of 
the  Motherhood  of  earth  ?"  And  the  woman  said :  "Mas- 
ter, have  I  done  my  work  as  thou  wisheth  me?"  And 
He  said  unto  her :  "Thou  hast  done  and  thou  shalt  hold 
the  perfect  thought  of  motherhood  for  earth."  And  He 
went  with  the  king  and  he  stood  in  front  of  the  temple 
and  the  king  proclaimed  Him  a  King  indeed,  and  he 
called  his  people  together  and  he  told  them  what  had 
come  to  them.  And  the  Master  stayed  and  taught  them 
many  days  and  then  He  went  His  way  with  thee  and  me 
and  that  which  was  Egypt  was  not  Egypt  any  more 
within  the  City  of  Babylon,  but  it  became  a  knowledge 
for  the  rest  of  the  time  of  the  second  habitation. 

Now  we  must  go  into  Egypt  and  I  saith  unto  thee 
that  we  tarried  not,  neither  did  we  stay  our  steps  until 
we  came  to  the  great  Egypt  of  the  third  habitation  and 
many  and  great  were  the  things  within  it.  But  it  had  no 
knowledge  of  the  Kingship  that  was  to  come  unto  it. 
And  we  took  unto  ourselves  a  body  each  apiece  and  we 
dwelt  near  the  heart  of  the  city  and  there  one  ruled  who 
did  not  belong  to  the  House  of  the  Pharaohs,  he  belonged 
to  the  Shepherd  Kings.  And  we  went  unto  him  and 
spake  with  him  and  he  kneweth  not  that  we  were  spirit. 
And  I  said  unto  him :  "I  am  a  scribe  and  I  search  amidst 
the  archives  that  I  may  find  a  manuscript  and  it  is  sealed 
with  a  green  stone  and  a  red  stone,  and  it  is  bound 
around  with  brown  bronze."  And  he  said  unto  us:  "I 
brought  this  with  me  from  the  great  land  of  the  North 
where  the  North  Star  holdeth  its  watch  over  us."  And 
thou  saith  unto  him:  "Was  there  a  master  there  that 
it  had?"  And  he  answered,  "Yea  verily."  And  he  stay- 
eth  and  abideth  with  us  and  taught  us  and  he  sent  me 

49 


thither.  And  the  name  of  this  Shepherd  King  was  Hea- 
bath,  and  his  father's  fathers  were  Chaldeans  and  thru 
them  had  come  this  manuscript.  And  he  said  unto  you : 
"Art  thou  a  master?"  And  thou  saith  "Yea"  but  I  said 
unto  him:  "I  am  a  scribe,"  and  he  told  us  if  we  would 
come  unto  him  he  would  have  this  manuscript  brought 
forth.  "I  knowest  not  what  is  within  it,  it  hath  never 
been  opened,"  and  I,  Marcus,  said  unto  thee :  "Knowest 
thou  and  remembereth  thou  not  when  he  who  was  the 
scribe  for  Pharaoh  searched  for  this  manuscript  and 
foundeth  it  not,  and  he  knew  not  whither  it  was?  And 
when  we  went,  according  as  the  king  said,  the  king  gave 
us  the  manuscript  and  it  was  bound  round  with  the 
brown  bronze  and  within  that  which  clasped  it  together 
were  the  two  stones,  red  and  green,  and  upon  the  stone 
was  the  symbol  of  the  old  city  of  Babylon.  And  he  saith 
unto  me :  "Thou  canst  have  this,"  but  I  knew  that  I  could 
not  read  it.  So  I  saith  unto  thee,  "We  will  wait  until 
Imhotep  comes  to  us  that  he  may  read  it."  And  when 
he  came  we  broke  the  seal  and  we  took  off  that  which 
bound  it  and  we  opened  it  and  one  portion  of  it  was  in  the 
old  Chaldean  markings;  and  another  portion  was  of  the 
old  Atlantean  marking;  and  another  portion  of  it  was  of 
the  Egypt  which  was  of  the  center  of  the  city  of  Babylon. 
And  Imhotep  read  it  according  as  it  was  written  and 
from  the  Chaldeans  he  read  that  there  shall  be  five  great 
circles  and  they  shall  be  filled  full  of  worlds  and  planets 
and  stars  and  luminaries  and  points  of  light.*  And  they 
shall  be  as  the  numbering  of  they  who  shall  be  within 
the  earth  from  its  beginning.  And  some  of  them  shall 
be  great  and  some  of  them  shall  be  small,  and  some  of 
them  shall  be  light  and  some  of  them  shall  be  less  light. 


♦Are  these  five  circles  the  circles  of  the  earth? 
Yes. 

50 


i 


And  unto  the  Chaldeans  this  knowledge  is  given  to  be 
held  through  all  the  different  habitations. 

Then  he  read  according  as  it  was  written  by  the 
Atlanteans  and  they  said:  "And  they  shall  hold  the 
knowledge  of  the  races  and  the  Law  of  the  Infinite  for 
each  one  and  when  there  cometh  a  race  that  shall  be  last, 
they  shall  hold  for  them  the  great  law  that  is  made  by 
the  Father  and  the  Son  and  the  Son  and  the  Son.  And 
not  until  then  shall  this  great  law  be  known."* 

Then  he  read  according  to  the  Egypt  of  the  City  of 
Babylon  and  it  read :  "And  they  shall  create  and  they 
shall  build  another  city  and  it  shall  be  ruled  over  by  the 
unknown  things  that  no  man  will  interpret  the  meaning 
thereof  until  there  is  another  habitation.  And  they  that 
builded  this  great  condition  shall  be  of  the  Seventh  Uni- 
verse, and  they  shall  hold  a  knowledge  of  this  record  and 
when  it  is  needed  for  the  earth  it  shall  be  brought  forth 
and  it  shall  be  written  and  the  written  words  shall  hold 
the  thoughts  of  they  who  bringeth  it  unto  the  earth. 

And  when  Imhotep  had  finished  reading  it,  thou  saith 
unto  him :  "Imhotep,  how  cometh  it  that  the  small  band 
that  the  king  gave  to  the  woman  had  the  red  and  green 
stones  within  it  is  here  within  the  manuscript?  But 
there  are  only  two  stones  instead  of  four."  Then  Imho- 
tep said  unto  thee:  "The  king  and  the  woman  took  it, 
under  obedience  to  the  Master,  unto  the  Sixth  Universe 
that  it  may  be  kept  perfect  unto  this  day,  but  the  Master 
giveth  unto  the  king  and  unto  the  woman  one  stone  eactf 
apiece.  Unto  the  woman  He  gave  the  green  stone  which 
shall  be  the  everlasting  growth  and  purity  and  upliftment 
for  her  and  for  all  of  they  who  cometh  unto  her.  And 
unto  the  king  He  gave  the  red  stone  that  there  shall  be 


♦This  race  that  shall  be  last,  is  that  the  4th  habitation? 
Yes. 

51 


firmness  and  faithfulness  and  justice  and  chanty.  And 
he  keepeth  it  within  this  Sixth  Universe.  And  when 
Egypt  of  the  third  habitation  hath  builded  again  they 
brought  it  unto  Egypt  and  unto  a  Shepherd  King  giveth 
it  he,  for  he  cometh  of  the  old  race  that  was  of  the  first 
Babylon  and  the  first  Egypt.* 

What  thinkest  thou  I  tell  this  unto  thee  for?  Thou 
hast  all  of  the  greatness  of  Egypt.  Thou  hast  a  knowl- 
edge of  Egypt  and  thou  hast  a  knowledge  of  the  many 
things  of  our  Universe.  And  thou  puttest  all  together, 
but  they  dost  not  know  the  finality  of  it. 

This  which  keepeth  itself  pure  that  it  may  hold  itself 
for  the  coming  of  the  great  race  that  is  not  known,  but 
what  is  to  be,  they  will  take  this  and  they  will  use  it,  but 
they  will  only  use  it  as  a  memory  of  what  the  earth  has 
been.  And  they  will  create  a  new  universe  and  they  will 
place  within  it  all  that  hath  been  within  Egypt,  but  the 
great  Egypt  that  was  the  beginning  will  hold  unto  her- 
self all  that  she  ever  held. 

Thou  saith  unto  Imhotep:  *'Let  us  gather  together 
the  knowledge  of  this  Egypt,  that  it  may  be  pure  in 
spirit  and  not  be  done  away  with."  And  Imhotep  saith 
unto  thee:  "It  will  be  like  gathering  the  stones  of  the 
temple  for  it  is  many  and  great."  But  thou  saith  unto 
him :  "It  is  not  as  many  as  the  stone  in  the  temple  I  am 
building."  And  I,  Marcus,  saith  unto  thee,  "Truly  thou 
didst  speak,  for  the  stones  in  the  temple  which  thou  art 
building  is  life  and  not  the  thoughts  of  men,  but  the 
thoughts  of  spirit.  And  thou  knowest  the  arches  hold 
that  which  is  pure."  And  thou  didst  say :  "I  will  take  the 
brown  bronze  that  holdeth  the  manuscript  that  hath  with- 


*And  is  that  what  will  be  brought  forth  in  the  new  condi- 
tion? 
Yes. 


in  it  the  two  stones  and  I  will  place  it  upon  the  door-fold 
of  the  temple  and  I  will  do  this  because  it  is  a  portion  of 
Babylon  and  Egypt.  And  this  Babylon  hath  not  to  do 
with  the  Babylon  of  the  third  habitation." 


QUESTIONS  AND  ANSWERS 

Q.     What  does  Babylon  mean? 

A.  The  Babylon  of  the  second  habitation  means  the  city 
builded  for  use — for  use.     Ba-ba-lon. 

Q.     What   do  you  mean  by  USE? 

A.  For  the  coming  and  the  going  of  nations  and  the  learn- 
ing and  the  putting  together  of  all  languages. 

Q.     Is  the  7th  Universe  a  triangle — three  cornered? 
A.     Yes.     It  is  the  Universe  of  obedience. 

Q.  Why  is  the  Pacific  Ocean  so  much  larger  than  the 
others? 

A.  Because  they  took  away  from  the  west  and  gave  to  the 
east  that  it  might  wait  for  the  coming  of  the  King. 


S3 


LESSON  V 


MARCUS— May  2,  1918 

And  so  it  has  come  to  you  and  I  have  been  able  to 
bring  back  a  holy  consciousness  as  I  have  put  together 
the  many  things  that  thou  know  hast  been.  And  as  we 
wandered  thru  Constantinople,  so  we  have  wandered  thru 
Egypt.  And  now  it  is  necessary  that  I  give  you  here  and 
there  glimpses  of  what  has  been. 

First,  it  was  that  one  of  the  great  masters  said  unto  us : 
"It  will  be  needful  that  there  shall  be  one  who  shall  gather 
together  many  symbols  to  be  placed  upon  the  pillars  of 
the  great  Temple.*  Who  shall  it  be?  Who  shall  know 
how  to  carve  them?"  And  then  he  looked  upon  you  and 
he  said:  "Thinkest  thou  that  thou  canst  carve  Truth 
upon  it?"  And  thou  didst  answer  and  say:  "Nay,  mas- 
ter, I  carve  not;  but  I  will  gather  together  the  symbols 
and  if  thou  wouldst,  I  will  find  one  that  can  carve  them 
for  you."  And  he  answered  and  he  said  unto  thee: 
"Very  well,  then,  it  is  for  thee  to  decide."  Then  he  said 
unto  me:  "Marcus,  canst  thou  bring  that  which  shall 
hold  upon  the  base  of  one  of  the  pillars  the  sustenance 
that  spirit  needs?"  And  I  said  unto  him:  "If  thou  wilt 
give  me  a  time  and  a  place  I  will  go  into  a  far  land ;  not 
what  is  earth,  but  what  is  greater  than  earth,  and  I  will 


♦Who  was  this  master? 
Melchoir,  the  Egyptian. 

54 


seek  to  bring  that  which  thou  knowest  they  hath  and  I 
will  place  it  upon  the  base  of  one  of  the  pillars."  Then 
he  said  unto  the  third  one:  "But  unto  thee  I  wouldst 
say  that  thou  must  go  into  the  heights  wherein  the  Father 
dwelleth  and  thou  must  seek  that  which  shall  be  the 
greatness  which  the  Temple  shall  hold.  Many  and  long 
will  be  the  days  wherein  thou  shalt  search  for  greater 
things.'* 

Then  the  three  of  us  stood  together  and  the  master 
saith  no  more  unto  us,  but  we  spake  together  and  this  one 
that  was  to  go  into  the  heights,  said :  "I  had  wished  that 
they  might  send  me,  for  knowest  thou  not  that  I  wouldst 
that  once  more  the  breath  of  holiness  should  be  breathed 
upon  me,  that  my  garments  shall  hold  what  no  one  hath 
ever  placed  therein."  And  he  went  his  way  and  thou  and 
I  hath  looked  for  him  many  times.  Once  in  the  great 
eastern  desert  we  knelt  in  prayer  and  thou  saidst  unto 
me :  "Marcus,  seeth  thou  the  brother  of  the  Seventh  Uni- 
verse? Methinks  I  saw  him  for  a  moment  and  his  face 
shone  with  a  great  glory."  And  I  said  unto  thee:  "I 
saw  nothing,  perhaps  it  is  because  I  must  go  into  a  far 
land  to  bring  that  which  the  master  saith  unto  me  that  I 
shall  find  therein."  Then  we  went  into  the  great  Egypt 
that  was  in  the  third  habitation  and  thou  didst  find  one 
who  was  very  cunning  in  carving  the  symbols  and  thou 
and  I  didst  abide  with  him  a  long  time,  even  unto  the 
days  when  his  body  grew  old,  according  as  the  time  of 
earth  was.*  And  he  carved  and  he  learned  every  symbol 
that  ever  was  made  or  ever  will  be  made.  Some  of  the 
symbols  held  within  them  volumes  of  thought;  others 
held  only  a  word ;  but  every  language  and  every  history, 
even  the  thoughts  of  great  men,  were  within  them.    And 


*Was  he  Joseph? 
Yes. 


55 


he  dwelt  in  a  place  in  the  city  close  by  a  great  Temple 
that  they  had  built.  But  one  day  he  said  unto  thee  and 
me :  "We  will  go  into  the  Temple,  there  is  something  I 
wouldst  that  thou  shouldst  see."  He  led  us  into  the  heart 
of  the  Temple  and  there  was  a  great  blaze  like  fire,  and 
thou  saidst  unto  him :  "They  needeth  no  purification  for 
thou  knowest  they  have  been  purified,  for  these  are  the 
g^eat  days."  And  as  we  stood  and  watched  it,  there 
came  unto  us  one  who  had  an  etheric  body  and  he  said : 
"I  have  been  everywhere  searching  for  thee,  for  thou,  too, 
art  masters.  Come  thou  with  me,  all  of  you,  for  I 
wouldst  that  thou  shouldst  see  the  great  change  that  is 
taking  place  within  the  earth."  And  thou  didst  go  with 
him  even  into  the  heart  of  the  pyramid  and  he  took  you 
within  the  great  Room  and  within  the  Circle.  And  then 
thou  didst  see,  and  as  thou  didst  look,  every  atom  of  the 
earth  became,  as  it  were,  transparent,  and  the  great  orbit 
of  the  earth  changed  in  its  movement,  and  thou  didst  see 
the  bodies  of  men  become  like  unto  vapor.  "This,"  he 
said,  "is  the  manner  in  which  the  second  habitation  shall 
pass  away."  And  we  felt  as  if  we  were  lifted  up  within 
the  Circle,  and  once  more  we  looked  and  we  saw  a  great 
space  and  everything  within  the  earth  was  held  silent; 
there  was  no  growth,  no  movement,  no  force,  no  action. 
And  the  five  Circles  of  the  earth  were  still  and  the  sun  and 
the  moon  and  the  great  planets  and  the  luminaries  kept  in 
their  places,  and  then  thou  didst  see  they  who  were  the 
masters  of  Egypt  take  with  them  that  which  is  a  reflection 
and  place  it  within  the  Etheric  Universes  that  lay  in  the 
land  wherein  I  afterwards  went.  And  thou  hast  known 
that  it  is  said  that  between  the  Second  habitation  and  the 
Third  was  the  windswept  condition,  and  they  of  Egypt 
placed  within  the  windswept  condition  a  reflection  of  all 
that  had  been,  and  it  was  there  and  it  remained  there 
12,460  days.     Then  the  ether  began  to  assume  a  more 

56 


solid  form  and  it  fractionized  itself  and  it  became  a  unit, 
each  according  to  its  own  self.  And  thou  didst  say  unto 
he  who  had  brought  us  there  :  "Givest  thou  to  us  a  mean- 
ing?" And  he  said:  "Knowest  thou  not  that  as  it  was 
in  the  beginning,  so  it  will  be  once  more?"  And  he 
showed  you  the  manner  by  which  the  great  knowledge 
that  Egypt  had,  came  to  them  from  the  beginning  when 
the  Father  separated  all  into  races  and  unto  them  was 
given  the  atoms  that  held  great  knowledge,  and  unto 
them  was  given  also  the  manner  by  which  this  could 
be  held.  And  there  were  those  who  knew  not  save  to 
keep  the  silence  for  the  earth  and  he  said :  "They  are  the 
Udans.  And  they  who  were  the  Chaldeans  and  the  Hit- 
ites,  they  shall  bring  both  the  Promise  and  the  Blessing; 
and  thou  shalt  know  in  the  days  to  come  why  it  is  that 
it  is  so  according  to  the  things  contained  in  the  land  of 
Egypt." 

And  he  went  his  way  and  thou  and  I  went  also,  and 
the  one  whom  thou  hadst  chosen  to  carve  the  symbols 
upon  the  pillar  said  unto  thee :  "I  will  meet  thee  in  the 
great  land  of  the  souls  and  thou  shalt  tell  me  where  I 
shall  find  the  Temple  that  thou  shalt  ask  of  me  to  carve 
upon  its  pillars."  Then  I  saith  unto  thee:  "I  go  and 
thou  must  go  again  unto  the  Seventh  Universe  and  wait 
for  me."  And  I  went  unto  the  great  Unknown  lands  and 
I  found  three  Laws  and  I  brought  them  with  me,  and  I 
said:  "We  will  go  to  earth,  it  is  the  third  habitation, 
and  we  will  go  unto  Egypt."  And  we  went  in  the  days  of 
the  King  and  there  was  but  one  Pyramid  left  standing 
and  he  said  unto  they  who  were  standing  with  him :  "It 
is  needful  that  we  shall  build  more  pyramids,  for  thou 
knowest  the  old  manuscripts  and  the  old  symbols  saith 
there  are  three."  And  we  went  unto  the  King  and  I  said 
unto  him :  "O  thou,  who  art  the  king  of  Egypt,  I  wouldst 
that  thou  shouldst  allow  us  to  be  with  thee  until  the  build- 

57 


ing  of  the  great  pyramids  is  complete."  And  he  knew 
not  that  we  were  spirit,  and  he  said  unto  thee :  "Who  art 
thou  that  thou  shouldst  demand  of  me  to  do  this  thing?" 
And  thou  didst  say  unto  him:  "I  wouldst  measure  and 
I  wouldst  place  the  great  Pyramid  according  as  it  is 
needful."  And  thou  didst  take  from  out  of  thy  mantle 
and  thou  didst  show  him  the  old  measurements  and  the 
old  ways  and  thou  didst  show  him  how  the  North  Star 
should  fall  directly  upon  the  apex  of  the  pyramid.  And 
while  he  spake  unto  you  there  came  one  who  was  from 
Chaldee  and  he  said  unto  thee:  "What  wouldst  thou  to 
do?"  And  he  answered  and  said:  "I  have  come,  for 
within  three  days  doth  the  North  Star  fall  directly  within 
the  triangle  of  the  heavens."  And  he  said  unto  you: 
"Wilt  thou  be  ready  ?"  And  thou  didst  answer  and  say : 
"Yea  verily."  And  we  went  forth,  for  the  city  was  new, 
for  the  greatness  and  the  power  of  the  king  had  not  been 
sent  forth  over  the  land  as  yet.  And  when  thou  hadst 
called  together  they  who  were  not  of  men,  but  of  the 
universes,  then  we  began  to  build  the  pyramid.  Thou 
knowest  that  there  came  unto  thee  he  who  was  the  third 
son  of  the  Pharaoh,  he  who  came  unto  the  king,  and  ruled 
many  years  afterward.  And  thou  didst  bring  from  out 
the  Seventh  Universe  he  who  had  always  builded  the 
great  things  for  the  Father.  And  when  thou  hadst  made 
the  place  that  would  measure  the  cubits  from  the  one 
pyramid  to  the  south  and  to  the  east  and  to  the  west,  thou 
didst  know  wherein  thy  Law  of  Obedience  came.  Then 
thou  didst  go  to  the  north  and  thou  didst  measure  from 
the  one  to  the  east  and  from  the  east  to  the  west  and 
thou  didst  know  that  thy  Law  of  Obedience  was  fulfilled. 
And  the  King  sent  for  thee  and  he  said  :  "What  hast  thou 
done?"  And  thou  didst  show  that  the  markings  upon 
the  ground  were  for  the  great  pyramid.  Then  thou  didst 
say  unto  me :    "Marcus,  whither  shall  we  go  that  we  may 

58 


find  great  stones?"  And  I  answered  and  I  said :  "I  have 
looked  everywhere."  And  we  goeth  100  miles  to  the 
south  and  we  go  20  miles  to  the  east  and  we  findeth  the 
quarry  wherein  are  the  stones  for  the  building.  And 
thou  didst  then  take  they  of  Egypt,  and  some  of  them 
were  great,  and  some  of  them  were  small,  not  according 
to  size,  but  according  to  place  in  the  royal  household ;  and 
some  of  them  said :  "What  thinkest  thou  that  thou  shalt 
find — that  where  the  stones  are  for  the  great  pyramid?" 
And  I  answered  and  said :  "Surely  thou  knowest  that 
we  are  master  builders."  And  he  said  no  more  and  he 
went  his  way.  And  when  thou  hadst  come  to  the  turn 
of  the  place  wherein  we  were  to  go  to  the  east,  thou  didst 
plant  an  obsoleek  (obelisk?)  and  it  had  three  sides  and 
it  stood  nine  feet  and  two  feet  of  it  were  in  the  ground 
and  thou  didst  build  it  of  one  stone,  and  it  measured  on 
each  side  four  feet — that  maketh  the  12  feet.  And  thou 
didst  place  it  there  that  they  would  know  whither  they 
were  going.  And  when  they  were  all  quiet  and  asleep 
on  their  journey  we  cometh  unto  it  and  thou  saith  unto 
me:  "When  thou  seeth  the  light  at  the  top  of  it  thou 
wilt  know  that  we  are  ready  to  move  the  stones."  And 
we  waited  until  the  third  hour  of  the  morning,  then  the 
light  came  and  thou  didst  pray  and  say  that  he  who 
sendeth  me  sendeth  also  that  which  shall  give  me  the 
power  to  do  according  as  the  third  habitation  demanded 
of  me.  And  we  went  unto  the  quarry  and  they  took 
long  pieces  of  wrought  and  polished  bronze  and  thou 
hadst  filled  them  with  steel,  for  thou  didst  make  them 
thyself,  and  the  point  of  each  one  of  them  thou  hadst 
touched  at  the  top  of  the  obsoleek,  and  when  they  traced 
the  side  of  the  stone,  it  cutteth  and  no  man  knew  why  it 
cutteth.  And  when  they  came  to  move  the  stones,  thou 
didst  place  them  on  each  side  of  the  stones  and  there  were 
three  on  each  side  and  there  was  one  at  the  top  covering 

59 


them.  And  some  saith  unto  thee:  "How  far  knowest 
thou  it  is  that  they  shall  be  moved?"  And  thou  didst 
say:  "I  have  measured  and  according  to  the  calculation 
of  man  it  is  many  miles ;  but  according  to  the  calculation 
of  they  who  belongeth  within  the  Seventh  Universe,  it  is 
not  far."  And  they  knowest  not  what  thy  meaning  was 
and  when  thou  hadst  placed  the  foundation  stones  of  the 
two  pyramids,  then  it  was  that  thou  didst  go  thy  way 
and  thou  didst  leave  Imhotep  and  me,  and  I  guided  the 
workmen  on  one,  and  Imhotep  upon  the  other.  And 
when  it  was  finished  and  completed  the  age  of  the  earth 
had  numbered  many  days. 

Then  it  was  that  it  became  known  that  there  had 
been  three  Kings  reigned  in  Egypt  since  the  beginning. 
And  these  who  were  there  called  together  their  people 
and  they  said :  "We  must  now  arrange  for  it  is  and  the 
great  work  is  finished."  And  there  was  great  rejoicing 
and  many  gathered  from  the  east  and  from  the  north 
and  from  the  south  and  they  came  together,  and  there 
was  great  feasting,  and  in  the  early  hours  they  gathered 
and  worshipped  the  God  of  the  Sun.  And  among  them 
was  one  who  was  of  the  Royal  House  and  her  name  was 
Phlelu  (pronounced  like  Flu-flo)  and  she  was  the  daugh- 
ter of  the  King  and  everywhere  throughout  the  land  she 
was  known  for  her  beauty  and  for  the  gorgeousness  of 
the  many  jewels  that  she  wore.  And  one  morning,  very 
early  in  the  morning,  she  came  to  the  camp  wherein  the 
workmen  abode  while  they  worked  to  finish,  and  she 
said  unto  Imhotep :  "Art  thou  the  master  who  buildeth  ?" 
And  he  said :  "Not  so."  And  she  saith  unto  me :  "Art 
thou  the  master?"  And  I  answered  and  saith  unto  her, 
"No."  And  she  saith:  "When  cometh  the  master  who 
hath  builded  long  and  great?"  And  she  saith  unto  us: 
"I  know,  for  it  is  written  among  the  many  symbols  of  the 
House  of  the  Kings  that  it  was  my  father's  father's  father 

60 


that  began  the  building  of  the  Pyramid.  And  I  know 
that  no  man  liveth  those  number  of  days,  so  I  knoweth 
thou  art  not  men,  thou  art  more  than  men,  thou  art 
spirit."  And  I,  Marcus,  saith  unto  her:  "If  thou  wilt 
look  thou  wilt  know  who  we  are."  And  then  she  said: 
"Yea  verily,  thou  art  of  the  Seventh  Universe,  and  thou 
knowest  there  are  sons  of  the  Universe  of  the  Seventh  and 
there  are  daughters  of  the  Universe  of  the  Seventh,  and 
thou  knowest  I  am  one  of  the  three  daughters  of  the  Unity 
of  Thought  within  the  Seventh  Universe."  And  I,  Mar- 
cus, said  unto  her:  "Surely  thou  art  a  great  and  wise 
counselor  and  I  looketh  for  he  who  was  the  master  of 
the  building."  And  Imhotep  said  unto  her :  "Thou  wilt 
come  at  the  night  hour  for  I  knowest  the  master  cometh 
unto  us  then."  And  when  thou  didst  come  we  told  thee 
of  her  visit  and  thou  hadst  not  been  long  until  she  came 
once  more  and  she  said :  "Thou  must  go  unto  my  father, 
the  King,  and  thou  must  find  thy  place  among  they  who 
are  of  the  royal  household."  And  we  went,  not  as  work- 
men, but  as  they  who  were  prepared  to  be  with  the  King, 
for  thou  bringest  with  thee  the  house  robes  of  the  Seventh 
Universe  and  they  were  purple  with  white  bands  and  they 
had  the  gold  and  the  silver  twisted  cords  that  held  them 
together.  And  when  we  came  to  the  King  in  the  aud- 
ience chamber,  the  daughter  of  the  King  said  unto  him : 
"Father,  knowest  thou  who  this  is  that  hath  come  to 
thee?  They  are  not  men,  but  spirit,  and  when  the  earth 
hath  grown  old  there  shall  be  a  time  when  they  will  tell 
how  this  all  hath  been  done,  for  no  man  will  know  how 
the  two  pyramids  were  builded."  And  they  called  unto 
the  people  and  the  people  bowed  their  heads  and  wor- 
shipped the  greatness  of  the  power  of  he  who  could  create 
according  as  it  was  given  unto  him  to  create,  and  when 
the  days  of  the  feasting  and  the  rejoicing  were  over,  we 
went  unto  a  quiet  place  and  thou  didst  say  unto  me: 

61 


"Marcus,  thou  hast  not  told  me  what  thou  didst  bring 
unto  the  earth,  only  that  they  were  laws."  And  I  saith 
unto  thee  the  master  of  the  land  spake  and  said :  "Thou 
shalt  take  these  Laws  and  they  shall  be  placed  within  the 
earth  and  they  are  the  Unknown  Laws  and  when  thou 
seeth  he  whom  thou  knowest  will  ask  of  thee  what  thou 
bringest,  thou  shalt  say  that  when  the  days  of  the  num- 
bering of  all  things  have  passed,  He  shall  take  a  physical 
body  and  the  spirit  of  him  shall  seek  within  the  earth  for 
the  three  Unknown  Laws."  I,  Marcus,  saith  unto  thee, 
one  of  them  is  the  Law  that  giveth  to  the  earth  the  power 
whereby  the  great  transcendant  light  shall  divide  it  and 
make  it  so  that  it  can  pass  within  the  first  great  Etheric 
Circle  that  shall  be  placed  around  it.  And  the  time  shall 
be  149  years  between  the  finding  and  the  movement  of 
one  great  Unknown  Law.  And  the  second  then  shall 
come  and  it  shall  be  that  there  shall  be  the  transition  from 
weight  unto  light  without  weight,*  and  every  atom  shall 
have  partaken  of  the  light  and  shall  be  lifted  up  and  there 
shall  be  a  zone  that  shall  measure  the  height  and  the 
depth  of  each  atom  and  they  shall  move  toward  it,  and 
the  shadow  of  the  earth  shall  pass  away  and  there  shall 
be  three  suns,  not  one;  and  the  Hght  of  them  shall  be 
greater  than  the  earth  hath  ever  known;  and  the  space 
between  the  second  Unknown  Law  and  the  third  Un- 
known Law  shall  be  1000  years  and  when  the  third  Un- 
known Law  is  given  the  earth  will  then  have  come  to 
the  last  condition  and  it  shall  be  turned  from  the  northeast 
to  the  southwest,  and  it  shall  not  be  round,  but  it  shall  be 
oblong;  and  300  days  will  it  be  likened  unto  this,  and 
then  the  forces  that  have  surrounded  it  will  be  withdrawn 
and  all  the  movements  that  have  been  within  it  shall  be 


"^Does  that  mean  the  transition  of  the  new  earth? 
Yes,   sir. 

62 


silenced,  and  then  at  the  end  of  the  days  it  shall  again 
turn  and  move  toward  the  west,  and  it  shall  move  in  great 
circles  and  the  circles  shall  be  measured  according  to  the 
height  and  the  breadth  of  the  Seventh  Universe  and  the 
Ninth  Universe  and  the  Third  Universe;  then  shall  the 
great  circles  of  the  earth  open  and  the  earth  shall  pass 
thru  and  it  shall  not  be  known  as  earth  any  more,  but 
round  about  it  will  be  the  glory  and  the  knowledge  of  the 
seven  great  races  that  the  Father  hath  created  and  there 
shall  be  brought  of  all  the  universes  wherein  the  masters 
have  been  who  came  to  earth  and  the  universes  of  the 
earth,  which  are  five,  shall  stand  to  the  north  and  the 
universes  which  have  within  them  seven  shall  stand  to  the 
south  and  there  shall  be  created  four  universes  for  the  east 
and  four  universes  for  the  west,  and  they  shall  all  move 
in  perfect  unity  and  the  knowledge  of  the  Law  and  thou 
shalt  look  and  see  the  glory  of  Egypt  and  thy  conscious- 
ness within  it  shall  be  as  one  day  according  to  the  num- 
bering of  the  law  of  the  Father. 


QUESTIONS  AND  ANSWERS 

Q.     How  many  Dynasties  does  this  History  cover? 

A.  Marcus  says,  who  is  it  that  saith  thus?  Because  do 
you  not  know  that  some  of  the  dynasties  were  given  unto  the 
hands  of  the  sister  of  the  King  and  she  giveth  it  unto  another 
family.  Then  how  canst  thou  say  that  any  dynasty  worketh 
according  to  the  son  following? 

Q.  I  would  like  to  know,  what  it  was,  that  formed  the 
light  in  the  top  of  the  column  or  obsoleek? 

A.  It  was  the  power  of  spirit  that  can  measure  everywhere, 
both  great  and  small,  and  spirit  understands  that  there  is  no 
weight  to  matter  and  those  pyramids  were  not  built  to  merely 
record  immensity  and  weight,  but  to  hold,  even  unto  the  next 
habitation,  the  measurement  and  the  power  of  spirit. 

63 


Q.  Weight — does  not  mentality  have  something  to  do  with 
weight? — the  burden — a  habit? 

A.  Yes,  mentality  makes  a  great  fraction  within  matter 
and  what  makes  it  heavy  is  fear  which  comes  thru  mentality  as 
it  calls  up   no  form. 

Q.  There  was  a  thought  given  that  Rome  or  the  Romans, 
represented,  thru  the  atoms,  the  strength  that  is  placed  within 
what  is  known  as  the  heavy  mechanism  of  the  world  today. 
Is  that  correct? 

A.  Rome  impregnated,  or  the  Romans,  the  atoms  and 
placed  upon  them  their  expression  of  destruction,  and  in  their 
depth  they  reached  that  out  of  which  mechanism  is  made,  or 
the  mechanical  formations  of  today.  While  mentality  added  its 
weight  to  those  and  hath  produced  what  will  destroy  itself. 


64 


LESSON  VI 


Subject:   The  Why  of  the  Knowledge  of  Egypt; 
The  Memory  of  Egypt;  Where  it  was  be- 
gun; Where  it  is  now;  What  portion 
you  and  I  formed,  etc. 


MARCUS— March  7,  1918 

We  are  going  to  have  the  Why  of  the  Knowledge 
of  Egypt ;  the  Memory  of  Egypt ;  Where  it  was  Begun ; 
and  Where  it  is  Now.  What  portion  you  and  I  formed 
within  it,  and  Why  we  formed  it. 

In  order  to  do  this,  we  must  begin  with  the  holy  con- 
sciousness of  what  was  the  first  Thought  in  the  placing 
of  us  as  spirit.  Why  Heldos  gave  her  aura  that  she 
created  to  Imhotep ;  and  why,  of  all  things,  Egypt  was  the 
one  to  hold  the  origin  for  earth,  of  the  Oath  of  Flame. 

Thou  knowest  why  we  were  of  the  same  cycle ;  thou 
knowest  and  it  hath  been  given  unto  thee  why  Heldos  in 
the  first  conscious  movement  of  spirit,  created  as  she  did. 
In  all  this  you  have  three  great  Principles;  three  great 
Conditions.  Thou  and  I  had  to  work  in  one ;  Imhotep  in 
two  and  Heldos  in  the  third. 

Why  did  you  and  I  work  in  one?  In  order  that  one 
should  hold  the  positive  and  the  other  the  negative  con- 
dition within  the  Principle.  Unto  us  was  given  the 
thought,  as  far  as  spirit  was  concerned,  to  pass  thru  and 
gather  together  the  greater  knowledge  in  order  that  it 

65 


might  be  placed,  and  by  so  doing,  thru  the  conscious 
knowledge  of  Infinite,  we  established  that  which  can 
never  be  done  away  with. 

In  the  first  great  predynastic  condition  of  Egypt,  there 
was  a  purer  element  of  knowledge,  for  unto  the  earth 
was  given  a  purer  condition  of  form,  and  its  disobedience 
did  not  fold  itself  so  closely  within  the  elements  of  cre- 
ated life. 

Passing  on  down  and  holding  ourselves  subject  to  the 
thought,  you  will  find  that  when  in  the  Holy  Places  had 
gathered  they  who  must  serve  the  Father,  He  gave  unto 
us  the  thought  or  condition  for  the  establishment  of 
Egypt.  What  did  it  mean  to  us  then?  A  fountain  of 
great  knowledge,  and  a  fountain  of  great  knowledge  it 
hath  remained  even  unto  this  day.  What  is  the  meaning 
of  this  fountain  of  knowledge?  That  there  shall  be  an  in- 
flow of  spirit  that  is  fine,  pure,  delicate  and  everlasting. 
In  the  old  predynastic  condition  it  was  not  mingled  with 
the  thought  of  personality,  and  the  first  great  conscious- 
ness of  spirit  when  Imhotep  held  for  himself  the  pure 
aura,  but  did  not  use  it  in  physical  form,  then  it  was  that 
we  knew  that  that  perfect  knowledge  for  earth  would 
always  remain  a  perfect  knowledge  . 

You  say,  did  they  build  cities  and  places  within  Egypt 
where  this  knowledge  could  be  stored?  Not  at  first,  for 
spirit  needed  not  the  earth  to  build  within  it  that  which 
already  was  builded.  In  this  I  strive  to  lead  you  away 
from  the  thought  of  placing  what  you  now  know  and 
what  you  have  known  in  the  past. 

Then  following  on  down  a  few  ages  brought  about  a 
condition  wherein  form  could  be  established.  It  was  here 
that  the  first  great  Pharaoh  that  held  form,  began  to  build 
under  the  direction  of  the  Brotherhood  of  the  Seventh 
Universe,  and  with  this  building  came  the  true  Principle 
of  perfect  unity.     In  that  and  thru  that  flowed  the  knowl- 

66 


edge  that  hath  always  been.  I  know  in  coming  in  contact 
with  humanity  today  that  they  think  that  the  source  of 
knowledge  was  established  within  earth,  but  I  say  unto 
you,  no  knowledge,  it  matters  not  how  great,  ever  had  its 
origin  within  your  material  earth.  The  purpose  of  estab- 
Ushing  a  great  city  with  its  temples  and  its  places  of 
worship,  its  palaces  for  the  kings  and  its  wonderful  homes 
for  its  people,  was,  that  there  might  be  a  form  for  all 
things  thru  which  this  could  act.  Unity  of  the  perfect 
was  carried  as  far  as  material  could  be  obtained  to  carry 
it. 

The  second  Egypt  was  only  an  imitation  of  the  first 
great  Egypt,  and  in  and  thru  this,  I  give  you  this  knowl- 
edge. And  if  you  wish  to  trace  it,  if  you  will  read  in 
Kings  of  the  splendor  of  Solomon  and  the  building  of 
his  Temple,  and  where  it  all  came  from,  molded  and 
planned  and  ready  to  be  put  together,  and  that  it  was  put 
together  without  the  sound  of  a  hammer,  you  may  know 
that  in  the  land  of  Ophir,  where  the  first  condition  of  old 
predynastic  Egypt  was,  came  the  material  out  of  which 
Solomon  builded  his  Temple.  It  came  by  sea  and  it  came 
by  land  and  from  out  of  this  wonderful  Egypt  came  all 
things  needful. 

Why  did  Solomon  demand  of  Egypt  these  things? 
Because  Solomon  was  of  the  House  of  Israel  and  the  King 
of  Egypt  was  one  of  the  Shepherd  Kings.  Was  this  be- 
fore the  physical  life  ?  I  answer  you  yea,  and  afterwards 
it  was  from  the  physical  life. 

This  land  lay  far  to  the  southwest  and  was  not  con- 
nected with  the  later  Egypt.  And  Solomon,  in  the  con- 
sciousness of  spirit,  dwelt  in  what  is  now  Egypt.  He 
held,  as  it  were,  for  the  people  there,  a  thought,  as  the 
Jehovah  of  the  Jews  held  later  for  them. 

Coming  into  the  second  condition  of  Egypt  after  the 
transference  of  the  windswept,  we  find  still  they  who  in 


the  consciousness  of  spirit,  always  have  acted  in  unison, 
once  more  establishing  the  condition  of  the  second  place 
of  Egypt.  In  and  thru  all  this  we  find  the  greatest  and 
most  condensed  form  of  mathematical  calculations.  We 
find  here  the  majesty  and  the  force  of  immensity.  We 
also  find  a  greater  grandeur  than  the  earth  has  had  since 
then,  and  in  a  portion  of  the  knowledge  of  Egypt,  of  which 
you  had  a  consciousness,  we  will  now  follow  down  closer 
than  we  did  the  last  time. 

This  time  I  take  you  with  me  in  the  consciousness  of 
spirit  to  the  western  portion  of  Africa;  there,  abiding  in 
great  number,  is  a  race  of  men  and  women  highly  cul- 
tured, wonderfully  developed  and  holding  their  places  as 
a  remnant  of  the  great  Israelitish  nation.  You  will  find 
no  history  of  this  anywhere  as  it  was  never  written.  They 
became  very  powerful,  and  in  the  great  reign  of  the  last 
Pharaoh  they  overpowered  and  subdued  Egypt,  but  not 
by  force  of  arms,  but  by  the  force  of  numbers.  Egypt  had 
assumed  a  tremendous  degree  of  power,  but  she  had 
lacked  the  manner  of  holding  it.  She  sent  word  to  these 
people  that  she  would  meet  them  upon  their  own  plane, 
and  she  met  them,  and  their  number  was  treble  that  of 
Egypt.  And  the  exchange  was  this,  that  if  they  had  a 
greater  knowledge  than  they,  then  they  would  worship 
and  be  subdued ;  but  if  Egypt's  knowledge  was  not  equal 
to  their  own  and  Egypt  held  not  the  numbering  they  held, 
then  should  they  be  proclaimed  king.  This  was  agreed 
upon  and  we  were  present  at  the  time.  They  were  called 
"Shepherd  Kings"  because  they  had  led  their  people  a 
long  ways  across  to  Egypt.  They  were  called  "Shepherd 
Kings'*  because  they  always  numbered  their  people. 
They  also  builded  many  cities  that  were  walled,  which 
had  never  been  done  before.  For  18,000  years  they  ruled 
Egypt  in  succession.  During  the  time  and  before  the 
return  of  the  Pharaoh,  there  came  into  their  midst  one 

•68 


who  dwelt  in  the  Twelfth  Universe.  He  v;as  a  mighty 
master  and  the  Shepherd  Kings  demanded  that  he  give 
them  a  Promise,  which  he  did,  but  in  exchange  they  were 
to  place  again  the  Pharaoh  upon  the  throne.  This  was 
done  in  order  that  the  succession  of  the  great  condition 
should  become  complete  once  more  for  the  earth.  In  all 
this  I  have  given  you  the  establishment  of  Egypt,  its  pur- 
pose and  its  place. 

It  was  during  the  reign  of  the  last  Shepherd  King  that 
the  subjugation  of  all  the  northern  portion  of  what  is  now 
Europe  was  accomplished.  And  then  began  the  division 
into  tribes,  and  when  that  was  accomplished,  the  work  of 
the  Shepherd  Kings  was  complete.  Some  of  them  lived 
to  be  a  hundred  years  old,  some  only  thirty.  And  during 
that  time  they  remained  successively,  not  as  far  as  father 
and  son  altogether,  but  according  to  the  family  that  held 
three  sons.     This  was  one  of  their  Laws. 

Now  I  want  to  bring  to  you  one  of  the  greatest  condi- 
tions of  spirit  in  the  consciousness  of  Egypt  that  we  have 
ever  had  together. 

You  know  there  had  to  be  some  form  by  which  the 
placing  of  knowledge  would  be  complete,  and  here  it  is 
where  Heldos,  Imhotep,  you  and  I  formed  the  great  con- 
dition. What  and  who  was  it  that  formed  with  us  this 
condition?  It  was  she  who  afterwards  was  known  as  the 
most  beautiful  woman  of  Egypt.  History  gives  no  truth 
to  what  really  was.  Her  name  was  Hilahatha,  and  she 
came  from  out  of  the  Sixth  Universe,  and  was  known 
with  Heldos  as  the  Triplicate  of  Movement.  She  chose 
to  take  a  physical  form  in  Egypt  at  this  time,  but  before 
doing  so,  every  arrangement  had  been  made  for  us  to  be 
with  her.  She  had  the  power  of  using  both  etheric  and 
spiritual  body,  as  well  as  the  physical  one.  She  had  great 
creative  powers  and  had  the  power  of  bringing  them  into 
physical  form.     We  all  assisted  her  in  every  way  and  this 

69 


is  where  we  form  the  great  Principle  of  Thought  for 
Egypt.  It  was  due  to  her  marvelous  powers  that  the 
grandeur  of  Egypt  became  what  it  did.  No  invention  of 
the  present  equalled  what  they  had  then.  No  forces  have 
ever  been  used  since  that  she  used,  and  yet  with  it  all, 
there  was  a  wonderful  delicacy  thru  everything  that  was 
created.  It  was  thru  her  the  first  form  of  language  was 
established.  Before  that,  language  was  a  method  of  gut- 
tural sounds  and  gestures.  Thru  her  came  the  first  use 
of  what  afterwards  was  the  Latin  and  the  Hebrew  lan- 
guages. Thru  her  efforts  a  form  of  numerals  and  letters 
was  placed.  And  many  were  the  hours  that  we  all  spent 
together. 

One  day  she  said :  "I  want  you  to  be  ready  to  be  with 
me  tonight."  Then  it  was  that  within  the  lofty  chamber 
of  her  own  home  wherein  she  had  established  every  light 
reflection,  every  electric  force,  every  sensitive  condition 
possible,  that  we  all  heard  and  knew  of  even  greater 
things  than  had  come  to  us  within  the  Universe.  It  was 
the  only  time  that  this  was  ever  accomplished,  for  earth 
has  grown  too  material.  Heldos  assisted  her  in  teaching 
her  people  how  to  manufacture  and  put  together  colors 
and  textures.  Thru  her  was  established  the  method  by 
which  silken  threads  were  woven.  She  also  had  them 
cultivate  and  raise  innumerable  bright  colored  spiders  of 
large  size  who  spun  the  most  delicate  webs  out  of  which 
was  woven  exquisite  laces  and  shadowy  silk  tissues.  All 
of  this  we  assisted  in  because  each  one  had  the  power  of 
utilizing  some  great  Principle  for  this  to  be  developed. 

The  power  of  passing  thru  the  air  was  more  perfectly 
developed  than  at  the  present.  Traveling  beneath  the 
water  was  also  one  of  her  great  accomplishments.  And 
at  the  present  you  have  a  very  crude  method. 

The  attraction  of  great  lights  from  planets  and  suns 
and  universes  and  zones  was  nothing  unusual.     All  this 

70 


will  give  you  a  slight  conception  of  the  thought  of  what 
our  consciousness  must  have  been  with  her. 

There  are  some  few  things  in  all  this  that  I  have 
wanted  to  tell  you,  for  one  reason,  is  because  at  one  time 
in  human  life  you  laid  aside  the  thought  of  any  creation 
being  marvelous.  Are  you  aware  that  the  Infinite  can 
take  breath  and  from  out  of  the  ether  of  your  atmosphere 
which  holds  fire,  air  and  water,  and  that  you  call  oxygen, 
that  one  of  those  breaths  can  formulate  one  million 
forms?  Perfect,  animated,  intelligent,  all  the  senses  de- 
veloped and  absolutely  perfectly  formed.  And  before 
the  earth  grasped  the  thought  of  materiality,  before  the 
material  atoms  become  the  supremacy,  this  could  be  done. 
There  is  the  origin  of  the  Israelites,  the  Hittites,  the 
Aryans  and  the  Atlanteans.  We  call  it  the  crystalliza- 
tion of  atoms  that  are  held  within  the  atmosphere,  perfect, 
pure,  undefiled  and  susceptible  to  creation  thru  the  breath 
of  the  Father. 


QUESTIONS  AND  ANSWERS 

Q.  That  would  explain  what  Living  Thought  told  us  one 
time  when  we  asked  how  many  were  created  in  the  first  creation, 
and  he  said,  three  thousand  million?     Yes. 

Q.  Marcus,  did  this  occur  before  planetary  atoms  with 
earth  had  the  power  of  assuming  form?  Yes,  that  is  what  we 
call  the  quickening  of  the  life  of  the  spirit,  but  in  later  quota- 
tion, man  has  attempted  to  explain  it  by  saying  "He  breathed 
into  them  the  breath  of  life." 

Q.     Will  you  explain  regarding  the  Triplicate  Movement? 

A.  Within  the  6th  Universe  the  Triplicate  Movement  is 
known  as  the  movement  of  the  universe  and  has  the  power  of 
producing  a  perfect  condition  of  movement.  "Triplicate"  with 
them  means  the  "within  of  the  within",  or,  as  you  would  say, 
a  circle  within  a  circle,  moving  in  opposite  directions.  That 
gives  you  the  space  between  the  circles  that  moves  in  unison 
with  both,  that  gives  you  the  triplicate. 

71 


Q.  What  portion  of  the  Tfiplicate  Movement  forms  itself 
in  our  knowledge  of  zonic  light? 

A.  It  forms  the  action  that  comes  between  the  time  when 
the  soul  takes  the  elements  of  atoms  and  the  final  creation  of 
the  aura  for  the  brain.  It  takes  a  triplicate  movement  to  do 
that.  You  have  the  movement  of  the  atoms,  the  movement  of 
the  soul  and  the  movement  of  the  aura. 

Q.  Then  the  Triplicate  Universes  must  create  a  triplicate 
light  within  the  zone. 

A.     Yes,  they  certainly  do. 

Marcus  wears  a  dark  blue  robe  with  gold  trimmings.  It  is 
different  to  what  he  usually  wears.  Meaning  of  the  robes  you 
wear? 

Well,  I  had  to  bring  you  the  Law  of  Creation  and  the 
placing  of  the  thought  thereof.     (Spiritual  Law). 

Marcus  says,  if  you  only  knew  the  meaning  of  so  many 
things  that  your  earth  holds  at  the  present!  The  formations  of 
great  events.  It's  like  when  Rome  conquered  the  world;  now 
spiritualization  has  begun  her  work  of  conquering  the  earth. 
Watch  carefully,  see  with  the  eye  of  a  Master's  love,  judge 
neither  nation,  nor  man,  then  will  come  to  you  the  realization 
of  what  the  work  is. 

Who  was  here  with  Dr.  L.  yesterday — who  was  the  lady? 
It  was  Catherine  tKe  Great,  the  old  Czar  of  Russia  (the  father 
of  the  present  Czar),  King  Alfred  of  England  (consort  of  Queen 
Victoria). 

What  was  the  meaning?  Do  you  not  know  that  the  fires 
of  the  Altar  holdeth  that  which  giveth  a  vital  principle?  Dr. 
L.  is  working  in  Russia  and  he  came  to  gather  together  some 
of  this  vitality,  for  every  one  who  has  attempted  a  leadership 
in   Russia  has  lacked  vitality. 


72 


LESSON  VII 


The  Mystic  Laws  of  Egypt.  —  The  First  Great 

Consciousness  of  Egypt,  not  as  one  Spirit, 

but  as  the  Spirit  of  Egypt 


MARCUS— November  7,  1918 

Marcus  says — Aveos,  Avenatus,  Avenushree.  Today 
I  am  with  you;  yesterday  I  was  with  you;  tomorrow  it 
will  be  the  same. 


Tonight  I  give  you  what  I  have  waited  a  long  time 
that  thou  shouldst  know,  for  thou  hast  questioned  how 
it  is  known  to  the  Father  the  measurement,  the  height, 
the  depth  and  the  greatness,  for  there  is  no  other  that 
He  hath,  but  unto  they  who  are  known  as  the  Gods  He 
giveth  the  power  of  a  more  equal  separating  into  frac- 
tions. What  thou  knoweth  in  the  physical  belongeth  to 
what  thou  knowest  as  earth,  and  I  wouldst  that  thou 
shouldst  know  how  thou  comest  in  touch  with  he  who 
was  given  the  placing,  and  he  was  called  the  God  of  the 
Universe.  Yet  unto  none  has  it  been  told  from  whence 
he  came.  All  that  thou  knowest  is  that  he  cometh  from 
the  Father.  I  say  unto  thee,  thou  in  the  spirit  wert  with 
they  who  were  known  as  the  Brotherhood  that  holdeth 
for  the  finite  that  which  hath  breath.* 


♦What  brotherhood  is  this? 
The  Holy  Brotherhood. 

73 


Where  dwelleth  they?  In  the  heights  into  which  the 
thought  of  man  hath  not  entered.  But  I  say  unto  thee, 
thou  knowest  not  when  it  shall  be  opened  and  that  it  shall 
be  known,  for  surely  He  who  giveth  infinite  holdeth  not 
back  from  finite  what  it  can  bear.* 

He  who  is  known  as  the  God  of  the  Universe  claimeth 
from  the  Father  the  universe  wherein  finite  was  created. 

And  there  were  three  masters  of  the  Universe  of  the 
Sun  and  they  brought  with  them  that  which  holdeth  the 
essence  of  finite  breath.  They  had  brought  it  with  them 
from  out  of  the  cycles  of  creation ;  and  they  kneweth  not 
until  that  day  what  should  be  done  with  it  or  where  it 
should  be  placed.  But  when  the  God  of  the  Universe 
turneth  his  face  toward  the  sun,  that  holdeth  these  mas- 
ters, they  heard  and  came  unto  him.  And  thou  and  I 
and  he  who  was  of  the  High  Heavens,  which  is  known 
in  Egypt  as  Lippotay,  he  who  had  marked  that  which 
should  be  the  dynasties  of  the  first  Egypt  of  earth,  and 
when  he  had  finished  his  portion,  thou  and  I  took  from 
out  of  it  what  we  knew  would  hold  the  finite  breath.  And 
it  had  no  measurement  within  it.  And  we  went  our  way 
unto  the  God  of  the  Universe,  and  they  of  the  Universe  of 
the  Sun  stood  and  formeth  themselves  according  to  the 
Triune — one  at  one  comer;  one  at  another;  and  another 
at  another.  And  the  God  of  the  Universe  saith  unto 
them:  "At  this  time  I  knowest  that  my  Father  hath 
need  of  the  finite."  And  they  of  the  Universe  of  the  Sun 
said  unto  him :  "Shall  it  be  according  to  the  multiplicity 
of  light,  or  shall  it  be  according  to  that  which  shall  be 
placed  within  a  circle?"  And  thou  and  I  listened  and 
he  said  unto  them :  "This  is  all  that  hath  been  given 
unto  me,  that  when  I  have  completed  my  work  I  must 


♦Will  we  be  able  to  develop  in  the  physical  so  we  can  bear 
this  knowledge? 

You  can  complete  it  in  the  physical. 

74 


call  upon  thee  and  thou  must  do  according  as  thou  know- 
est."  And  they  closed  around  us  and  there  were  six  of 
us.  And  I  asketh  of  he  who  was  the  God  of  the  Uni- 
verse: "Why  is  it  that  there  are  six  of  us?"  And  he 
said:  "Seeth  thou  not  another?"  And  as  I  looked  I 
saw  he  who  was  the  creator  of  the  souls  into  which  the 
breath  of  finite  entereth.  And  I  knew  that  he  would  be 
called  the  Hqly  Spirit.  Three  times  the  light  that  he 
brought  with  him  folded  us  around  about  like  a  mist  that 
had  within  it  many  shades,  and  every  time  it  covered  us 
the  shades  lightened  until  at  last  it  hath  no  shade,  for  all 
was  cleared  away. 

Thou  wilt  know  my  meaning  when  thou  cometh  close 
enough  to  the  knowledge  of  the  finite  in  earth  which  shall 
be  thy  portion  when  thou  hast  learned  all  these  things. 

Then  it  was  that  the  great  masters  of  the  Sun  held 
forth  their  hands  and  from  out  of  them,  lifting  itself  like 
a  vapor,  floated  the  breath  of  the  finite,  and  the  Holy 
Spirit,  he  who  was  the  great  creator,  gathered  together 
that  which  had  gone  forth  from  them  and  gave  it  what 
man  saith  is  an  intelligence. 

Follow  thou  closely  my  meaning,  and  knowest  this, 
that  ever  since,  it  mattereth  not  where  it  be,  this  intelli- 
gence permeates  all  things  that  can  claim  ether  as  a 
portion  of  itself.  For  this  was  the  creation  of  finite 
breath  that  hath  never  lost  its  force  or  its  power.  Even 
now  man  knoweth  not  whither  it  goes,  though  he  may 
claim  the  right  to  hold  it  and  send  it  forth,  but  it  is  not 
subject  unto  him,  he  is  subject  unto  it. 

Thou  hast  asked  of  me  what  is  the  height,  and  I  say 
unto  thee  it  is  that  which  calleth,  not  only  the  God  of  the 
Universe,  but  the  Holy  Spirit,  all  masters  and  all  brother- 
hoods, and  calleth  them  that  they  may  have  the  breath  of 
the  finite,  not  as  man  saith  it  is,  but  as  God  saith  it  is. 
(What  God  ?    The  God  of  the  Great  Heavens.) 

75 


Then  thou  hast  questioned  and  thou  saith  unto  me: 
"What  is  it  that  is  the  great  measurement?"  And  I  say 
unto  thee:  "Thru  the  knowledge  of  holy  breath  thou 
entereth  into  the  Great  Heavens.  And  thru  the  knowl- 
edge of  the  holy  breath  which  was  breathed  into  the 
infinite  of  thy  spirit,  the  Great  Heavens  became  unto 
thee  the  knowledge  wherein  Egypt  was  blessed,  and  gave 
unto  Egypt  the  name,  which  is  Knowledge." 

Then  thou  asketh  of  me,  what  bringeth  it  within  a 
circle  that  hath  a  cycle  within  it?  And  I  say  unto  thee, 
it  is  that  thou  shalt  go  and  go  and  thou  shalt  find  neither 
beginning  nor  end,  for  thou  seeketh  it  not,  but  wherever 
thou  findest  a  light,  thou  knowest  that  the  cycle  within 
the  circle  is  not  measured,  but  thou  canst  go  forever  and 
forever  within  it,  finding  what  thy  infinite  can  under- 
stand. 

What  have  I  given  thee?  That  which  is  known  as 
the  Mystic  Laws  of  Egypt.  None  can  read  them  as  thou 
readest.  Within  them  is  the  Seal  of  the  Temple.  Within 
them  is  the  cornerstone  which  lay  ready  for  the  founda- 
tions of  all  worlds.  Within  them  is  the  symbol  that  be- 
longeth  within  the  archway.  Also  thou  shalt  find  there 
the  first  creation  of  the  Temple  of  Infinite  Thought.* 

I  said  unto  thee,  there  should  be  the  White  Brother- 
hood and  the  Blue  Brotherhood  and  the  Orange  Brother- 
hood. I  say  unto  thee,  thou  hast  known  that  which  is 
of  the  White  Brotherhood  and  of  the  Blue  Brotherhood, 
but  tonight  I  giveth  thee  a  higher  knowledge  of  the 
Orange  Brotherhood.  Within  this  thou  shalt  trace  out 
the  outflow  of  the  fountain  whose  waters  hold  nothing 
save  pure  thought. 


*Is  not  this  Temple  and  the  Temple  of  "Living  Thought,' 
one  and  the  same? 
Yes. 


Thou  must  have  a  knowledge  of  when  these  masters 
of  the  Universe  of  the  Sun  Hved  with  us  within  Egypt 
even  into  the  third  habitation.  One  of  them,  his  name 
was  Nathpo.  The  other  was  Nathor,  and  the  third  was 
Naleita.  And  they  reigned  in  three  dynasties  and  they 
builded  temples  that  were  in  a  circle.  And  when  I  say 
unto  thee  that  this  was  the  first  time  that  man  received 
a  knowledge  that  a  temple  should  have  a  dome  above  it, 
thou  shalt  read  the  symbol  wherein  thou  didst  find  in 
Constantinople  the  place  beneath  the  dome  that  holdeth 
the  stone  wherein  were  many  symbols  placed. 

This  for  thee  will  be  a  hard  lesson  and  much  thought 
wilt  thou  give  it,  and  thou  wilt  then  know  the  meaning 
of  the  measurement  of  infinite  and  why  it  is  only  three 
times  that  a  measurement  is  made. 

I,  Marcus,  would  speak  with  thee,  for  many  things 
have  come  unto  the  age  of  the  present  that  were  foretold 
in  Egypt  of  the  past. 

And  these  three  masters  of  the  Universe  of  the  Sun, 
when  they  reigned  as  kings,  told  many  things.  But  they 
who  made  a  record  of  them,  took  them  away,  for  they 
knew  that  no  man  would  be  able  to  understand. 

The  first  one,  he  gave  them  what  he  saw.  It  was  the 
movement  that  should  come  to  the  earth  in  the  third 
habitation  and  he  showed  them  the  breaking  of  the  circle 
and  he  showed  them  the  entrance  of  all  things  that  would 
form  the  holy  light. 

And  the  second  one  of  the  kings  wrote  his,  and  he 
wrote  upon  a  scroll  of  thin  copper  and  he  laid  it  away 
and  no  man  hath  found  it.  But  upon  it  is  written  that 
when  the  age  cometh  there  shall  be  divine  things  and 
they  shall  find  a  place  where  the  masters  can  give  them  to 
they  who  waiteth  for  them.  And  there  shall  be  confusion 
and  turmoil  and  strife,  but  this  which  cometh  shall  come 
with  love  and  peace. 


And  the  third  king  he  giveth  his  unto  they  who  Ust- 
eneth  with  the  ears  of  the  spirit  and  they  came  from 
every  portion  wherein  the  Father  had  created  them,  to 
fill,  even  from  the  heights.  And  he  said  unto  them: 
"Wait  thou,  for  thy  Father  will  call  thee  that  thou  shalt 
know  they  who  have  been  created  for  this  earth;  and 
thou  shalt  loosen  every  bond  and  thou  shalt  make  free 
all  places,  for  thou  wert  given  a  knowledge  of  the  breath 
of  infinite  and  thou  wast  given  a  knowledge  of  the  breath 
of  finite  which  they  who  inhabit  the  earth  hath  no  knowl- 
edge of.  And  he  said  unto  them :  "And  there  shall  be  a 
multiplicity  of  light  and  it  shall  be  as  if  the  firmament 
of  the  heavens  were  filled  full  and  there  shalt  be  a  coming 
close  and  a  breaking  asunder  and  a  new  light  and  a  new 
consciousness.*  And  this  consciousness  shall  be  born 
unto  they  who  seek  it  first;  afterwards  they  shall  give  it 
unto  they  who  seeketh  not,  but  are  listening  that  it  shall 
come  unto  them.  And  I  said  unto  him :  "Tellest  thou 
unto  us  why  thou  speakest  of  a  new  consciousness?" 
And  he  said:  "Surely  thou  must  know,  for  thou  wert 
with  me  when  we  created  the  breath  of  the  finite  and 
thou  shalt  listen  when  the  silence  of  movement  of  all 
multiplicity  of  light  is,  then  thou  shalt  know  that  the 
transition  is  finished  and  finite  hath  become  imbued  with 
the  breath  of  the  infinite  and  my  work  is  complete. "f 

In  thy  thought  thou  art  feeling  that  there  is  a  revela- 
tion at  the  present  and  thou  art  waiting  that  it  shall  be 
made  plain.  I  say  unto  thee :  "John  wrote  many  things 
and  many  things  were  destroyed  wherein  he  wrote  and 


♦Is  this  new  light  the  Divine  Master's  star? 

Yes. 

tDoes  this  transition  mean  the  spiritual  mentality? 

Yes. 

78 


I  bring  unto  thee  this  night  one  of  the  greatest,  for  when 
He  who  was  a  disciple  of  the  Father,  readest  from  the 
Book  he  readeth  not  all  that  was  therein,  for  this  revela- 
tion was  one  of  them  and  thou  hast  often  said :  'He  giv- 
eth  us  not  all,  only  a  portion.'  " 

Write  thou  these  words :  And  there  shall  be  no  divi- 
sion of  the  land  of  the  Father,  neither  shall  He  giveth  it 
unto  any  one,  but  unto  all.  They  who  hath  greatest  love 
shall  give  most;  and  they  who  needeth  most  will  receive 
it.  And  when  the  great  day  cometh,  it  shall  be  full  of 
blessing  and  not  curses.  It  shall  be  holy  and  blessed, 
and  there  shall  be  no  need  of  strife.  There  shall  come 
one  who  driveth  three  steeds  that  hath  no  color,  neither 
white  nor  black ;  and  he  holdeth  the  reigns  of  his  steeds 
with  both  hands,  but  he  hath  no  chariot,  but  his  feet  are 
winged  and  the  soul  of  him  was  created  long  before  the 
light  of  the  earth  was.  This  I,  Marcus,  say  unto  thee, 
holds  the  knowledge  of  the  finality. 

The  three  steeds  with  no  color  is  Divinity,  Infinite, 
Equality.  He  who  driveth  shall  be  given  the  knowledge 
of  all  that  is.  He  hath  no  chariot,  for  his  feet  are  winged 
and  beareth  eternal  time  beneath  them. 

This  is  the  great  revelation  that  hath  not  been  ful- 
filled. And  it  cometh  in  a  day  and  an  hour  when  no  man 
looketh  for  it.  The  harvest  will  be  golden.  There  shall 
be  no  shadows  of  night.  There  shall  be  no  curtains  cov- 
ering or  shutting  away  that  which  shall  be  known. 

This  night  I  come  unto  thee  with  the  words  that  tell- 
eth  thee  that  I  have  been  given  the  Law  of  the  Mystics. 
I  have  served  three  years  that  it  might  be  mine  to  give 
unto  thee  within  earth  and  thou  must  study  it  and  learn 
it  that  it  may  be  yours. 

I  wouldst  thee  of  the  things  of  today  only  a  little. 
There  are  three  divisions;  one  moveth  toward  the  west 

79 


and  holdeth  justice;  one  moveth  toward  the  east  and 
holdeth  ignorance;  and  one  lifteth  itself  above  and  no 
man  can  direct  it  save  He  who  is  the  Divine  Master. 


QUESTIONS  AND  ANSWERS 

Q.     Marcus,  what  do  you  mean  by  the  "Great  Day?" 

A.  It  is  that  which  hath  no  night  in  it,  no  closing  hours. 
And  when  thou  cometh  to  it  thou  shalt  once  more  claim  what 
is  thine  and  it  is  a  vision  of  the  eternal. 

He  says  (Marcus):  Thou  hath  often  thought  of  me  as  he, 
who  with  the  trowel,  buildeth  the  wall,  and  yet  have  I 
not  given  thee  a  knowledge  of  all  my  building?  And  thou 
putteth  it  together  and  knoweth  it  is  strong  and  powerful,  and 
I  have  builded  for  thee  from  the  beginning  of  the  7th  Universe. 
Sometimes  a  portion  of  it  was  outside  the  orbit  of  the  earth, 
sometimes  it  was  in  one  habitation  and  sometimes  in  another. 
But  thou  knowest  every  stone  fitted  together,  and  it  was  the 
wall  that  protecteth  thee  as  thou  standest  amidst  all  things 
and,  looking,  thou  knewest  that  thou  wert  safe. 

When  thou  asketh  of  me  I  will  say  unto  thee,  that  this 
I  have  given  thee  is  the  first  great  consciousness  of  Egypt,  not 
as  one  spirit,  but  as  the  Spirit  of  Egypt. 

Q.     Will  you  explain  this  a  little  please? 

A.  The  Spirit  of  Egypt,  like  the  Spirit  of  a  Nation,  is  com- 
posed of  that  which  emanates  from  Infinite  Spirit,  and  which- 
ever portion  is  strongest  at  one  moment,  it  acteth  it  out.  If  it  Is 
strongest  with  finite,  thru  that  which  was  the  born  intelligence 
from  the  beginning,  then  it  moveth  according  as  that  is.  If  it 
cometh  closer  with  the  Infinite — the  essence  of  the  Great  Cen- 
tral Force — then  it  carryeth  only  a  pure  spiritualization. 

Marcus  says,  you  (Mr.  G.)  look  thru  finite,  for  you  are 
trying  to  hold  your  place  within  that  which  is  form.  When 
thou  finisheth  it,  then  thou  wilt  look  with  the  Infinite. 

80 


Q.  Will  I  get  thru  with  that?  (Mr.  G.)  Yes.  Thru  that 
thou  hast  found  intelligence  and  mentality  and  it  hath  given 
thee  a  place  within  physical.  Yet  within  it  all  was  thine  own 
Infinite  breath. 

Q.     Marcus*  robes  are  gray  this  evening — what  is  meaning? 

A.  Because  tonight  at  twelve  the  Grey  Brotherhood  take 
their  stand  in  a  circle  around  all  of  the  foreign  powers. 

It  was  written  by  the  old  prophet:  "Who  shall  withstand 
the  armies  of  the  Almighty." 


81 


LESSON  VIII 


MARCUS— May  1,  1919 

I,  Marcus,  must  begin  that  we  can  put  together  for 
you  that  you  may  know  that  those  of  us  of  the  Seventh 
Universe  hold,  as  it  were,  ourselves  together  by  the  great 
bond  that  is  known  as  they  who  represent  in  every  por- 
tion of  Infinite  creation  the  knowledge  of  the  Mystery  or 
Mysticism  of  the  Seven.  I  have  long  known  that  the 
time  would  come  when  I  would  give  unto  thee  a  strong, 
true  expression  and  that  you  would  pass  with  me  from 
light  to  light  and  have  no  thought  of  anything  ever  being 
created  but  what  was  in  perfect  accord  with  Infinite 
thought,  Infinite  obedience  and  Infinite  love.  In  the 
creation  of  all  great  conditions  there  are  many  ages  be- 
fore the  construction  is  begun,  and  you  and  I  have  always 
known  when  it  was  and  how  long  it  would  be  before  the 
gfreat  construction  would  be  actually  carried  out.  I  took 
upon  myself  a  place  within  the  earth  long  before  you  did, 
and  there  are  many  of  our  Universe  who  have  passed 
from  place  to  place  carrying  with  them  a  knowledge  of 
what  first  produced  the  thought  of  the  construction  of 
many  things.  I  gave  you  a  perfect  consciousness  of  when 
the  foundation  of  the  earth  was  laid,  and  yet  the  ages 
that  elapsed  before  it  was  commenced  were  many.  To- 
night I  want  to  give  you  something  with  regard  to  the 
first  thought  of  the  Electic  Circle.  Little  is  known  with 
regard  to  it,  as  the  passing  of  the  great  seven's  is  what 
surrounds  it  and  shuts  it  away,  and  not  until  spirit  is  pre- 


pared  to  use,  thru  human  mentality,  a  knowledge,  can  it 
be  given  unto  them. 

There  are  fourteen  sevens  that  comprise  the  Circle 
that  first  held  the  thought  of  the  construction  of  the  Elec- 
tic  Circle.  Ours  was  one  of  the  seven;  and  there  one  of 
the  Bound  Universe,  one  of  the  Free,  one  of  the  Thought 
Universe,  one  of  the  Unit,  three  of  the  Therum  and 
three  of  the  Uram.  We  all  held  ourselves  very  closely 
in  our  relationship,  for  we  knew  that  very  great,  indeed, 
was  to  be  the  thought  that  could  be  placed  and  held 
within  such  a  circle.  We  knew  it  was  to  be  a  circle  from 
the  formation  of  the  wonderful  condition  that  was  to  hold 
the  power  of  its  creation.  Human  thought  can  encom- 
pass Uttle  of  what  it  really  was  like,  but  I  will  place  it 
as  best  I  can  that  you  may  have  some  thought  of  its  con- 
dition. 

We  were  called  together  from  out  of  the  heights  and 
we  stood  facing  the  great  circle  out  of  which  had  come 
the  Unit  Universes  and  they  of  the  Circle  beyond,  mov- 
nig  like  a  tremendous  mass  of  form,  they  swerved  toward 
the  east,  and  then  came  and  formed  a  half  circle.  It 
was  before  the  Spheres  were  created,  and  the  Most  High 
God  stood  upon  a  tremendous  pinnacle  looking  over  the 
great  clustering  of  the  7's.  The  mystery  of  the  thought 
of  the  7's  is  this:  Unity  of  Infinite  brings  forth  unity 
of  spirit.  Within  these  words  is  the  great  key  that  will 
unlock  many  times  for  you,  this  knowledge.  And  in  the 
silence  it  will  come  to  you  and  you  will  know  the  mean- 
ing of  the  symbol. 

Seven  times  in  holy  obedience  did  we  wait  for  that 
which  would  come  unto  us,  and  the  Most  High  God 
closed  the  circle  when  he  said  unto  all  of  us :  "And  thou 
shalt  form  thyselves  into  what  shall  ever  afterward  be 
known  as  the  Circle  of  the  Seven;  and  when  thou  hast 
done  this,  thou  shalt  see  lifting  from  out  of  it  the  power 

83 


that  shall  supply  anything  that  will  be  needed  from  now 
on  and  shall  be  known  as  the  Seven  and  the  unexplained 
thought  of  the  mystic  number.  Difficult  though  it  may 
be  for  me,  I  will  still  strive  to  trace  this  thought  for  you, 
and  in  it  all  you  will  recognize  that  Unity  was  the  found- 
ation upon  which  we  placed  the  first  consciousness  of  this 
structure. 

What  was  the  Electic  Circle  for?  That  there  might 
be  within  it  that  which  transcends  and  holds  a  perfect 
thought  for  spirit  until  spirit  shall  claim  it.  What  is  the 
Perfect  Thought? — must  remain  for  spirit  to  seek  and 
accept  for  itself.  The  Electic  Circle  is  not  what  would 
be  known  as  simply  a  thread  of  light  with  projections  of 
light,  but  its  movement  is  wondrous  in  many  ways. 
This  movement  always  answers  to  the  great  Infinite  con- 
sciousness, and  as  spirit  watches  it  there  comes  unto 
them  that  which  cannot  be  given  in  any  other  way. 
From  out  of  the  Circle  of  the  Seven  as  the  formation 
came  forth,  it  had  within  it  27  great  bodies  of  light;  6 
were  for  the  center  and  21  for  the  Circle.  Each  one  rep- 
resented the  intelligence  and  the  consciousness  of  every 
created  thought  that  belonged  to  the  Circle  of  the  Seven. 
The  Uram  gave  that  which  came  from  beyond  what  the 
thought  of  man  has  so  far  been  able  to  grasp.  The  Unit 
Universes  gave  that  which  held  always  a  new  unfold- 
ment ;  and  within  the  Electic  Circle  this  was  placed ;  for 
every  degree  of  light  there  came  forth  still  greater  de- 
grees of  light.  If,  after  it  was  established,  any  great 
substance  required  more  intensity  of  consciousness,  the 
Electic  Circle  supplied  it.  The  earth  has  never  been 
given  the  right  to  demand  anything  from  it.  In  form,  if 
I  give  you  its  construction,  it  would  be  a  wheel  with 
millions  of  spokes,  each  spoke  revolving  upon  its  own 
axis,  and  the  numbers  of  the  outer  edges  of  the  wheel, 
of  which  there  are  21,  acting  upon  their  own  axis.     It 

84 


gives  you  a  very  intricate  description,  perhaps,  but  with 
thought  you  can  understand  me. 

Upon  what  foundation  is  all  spiritual  form  placed-^ 
is,  perhaps,  a  grave  question  with  yourself,  but  in  the 
measurement  and  the  composition  of  the  ether  lies  the 
power  of  sustaining,  holding  and  controlling  everything 
that  needs  a  foundation.  And  they  of  the  Seven  Circle 
(Circle  of  the  Seven)  knew  this  and  used  it. 

You  may  take  in  planet  form,  and  there  are  millions 
of  planets  outside  of  the  earth's  orbit  and  they  ofttimes 
rest  upon  a  square  of  ether,  clear  as  crystal,  yet  subject 
to  instantaneous  dissolution  if  needful.  This  gives  you 
the  thought  that  even  amidst  the  great  creations,  there 
was  placed  that  which  can  be  called  a  foundation. 

The  Electic  Circle  in  the  beginning,  was  formed  for 
the  purpose  of  the  purification  of  that  which  surrounded 
it,  for  within  it  was  drawn  everything  that  did  not  move 
as  a  perfect  unit  with  that  which  surrounded  it.  I  do 
not  mean  by  this  the  imperfections  as  placed  by  man 
within  physical,  but  as  you  take  from  out  of  the  great 
creations,  portions,  you  will  find  that  spirit  must  mold 
it  and  place  it  and  it  always  gathers  an  added  strength  by 
passing  thru  such  a  process. 

The  Electic  Circle  was  rested  upon  21  great  portions 
of  this  ether  and  that  you  may  become  conscious  of  the 
immensity  of  such  a  condition,  I  wish  to  say  to  you  that 
each  stone  measured  three  times  the  size  of  the  earth 
and  its  orbit,  four  times  the  height  of  it,  and  there  were 
21  of  them.  Giving  you  this  thought  leads  you  out  into 
the  greater  mathematical  calculations,  proving  to  you 
the  immensity  that  spirit  can  encompass  in  its  thought; 
but  thru  the  mechanical  formation  of  man's  brain,  there 
are  a  few  who  can  calculate  in  such  a  way,  and  not  unless 
you  are  prepared  could  it  come  to  you  in  any  way  or 
explain  to  you  the  full  meaning  of  such  an  immensity. 

85 


This  brings  us  then  to  where  the  establishment  of  the 
placing  of  numbers  around  the  Electic  Circle.  Why  are 
they  numbers?  They  are  neither  universes,  worlds  or 
planets ;  they  are  what  are  known  to  us  as  the  Numbers 
of  Exthoidious,  which  means,  a  world  within  a  world. 
And  they  are  numbered,  and  as  there  are  the  two  condi- 
tions in  one,  they  are  not  placed  as  a  universe  or  a  planet. 
The  placing  of  these  was  for  the  purpose  of  holding  all 
spirit  for  any  length  of  time  that  might  want  to  utilize 
greater  powers  than  could  be  used  within  earth ;  created 
for  earth  they  could  claim  this  right  and  use  it,  but  if  they 
did,  they  did  not  go  to  earth  for  that  purpose,  but  went 
into  higher  conditions.  For  example  :  They  could  go  into 
the  Unknown  Lands  or  into  the  Great  Heavens  or  into 
the  High  Heavens;  they  could  even  go  into  different 
universes.  This  wonderful  condition  of  spirit  placed 
them  into  such  a  pure  atmosphere  that  they  could  not 
bring  it  in  connection  with  finite  matter  at  any  time,  age 
or  condition. 

The  placing  of  these  13  great  conditions  was  sur- 
rounded each  one  by  14  circles  of  light.  These  circles  of 
light  could  hold  any  condition  of  form  at  any  time.  At 
intervals  great  masters  have  placed  the  formation  of  the 
seals  for  various  planets,  or  even  for  the  earth.  In  it 
could  be  created  cells  for  different  things;  and  there 
you  will  often  find  what  was  left  after  great  impressions 
were  made  of  these;  they  never  lost  it,  it  remained  the 
same. 

Outside  of  all  that  was  the  first  placing  of  the  Unit 
Universes  and  they  held  that  place  for  over  three  millions 
of  years;  then  they  moved  aside  and  the  Electic  Circle 
remained  then  within  the  numberings  for  one  million  of 
years;  then  it  was  left  to  move  for  itself.  At  that  time 
the  great  foundations  were  dissolved  and  out  of  it  were 
created  over  50  millions  of  nebulae  for  them,  the  founda- 

86 


tion  had  to  draw  from  the  Electic  Circle  a  great  con- 
sciousness that  had  to  be  used  for  creative  purposes. 

In  all  this  you  find  that  no  residue  but  what  is  per- 
fectly complete  and  can  be  used  any  moment  it  is  re- 
quired. 

I  know  as  I  come  in  touch  with  you  that  the  grandeur 
and  the  greatness  to  you  seem  almost  beyond  comprehen- 
sion, but  I  wouldst  that  thou  shouldst  have  a  knowledge 
as  thou  dost  pass  forth  knowing  that  thou  hast  made 
thy  soul  body  as  perfect  as  thou  couldst;  all  this  thou 
wilt  have  learned  and  thou  canst  go  and  become  con- 
scious of  it  for  thyself.  All  this  holds  within  it  what  is 
known  to  us  as  the  great  multiplicity  of  spiritual  thought. 
It  is  never  laid  aside  and  once  in  a  while  as  the  great 
condition  moves  and  there  are  those  who  hold  within 
the  brain  the  height  of  the  sensitive  portion,  it  can  find 
an  outlet. 

While  I  held  a  place  within  physical  life,  it  was  long 
before  I  could  make  myself  realize  that  these  things  were 
possible.  But  once  or  twice  it  was  my  pleasure  to  come 
in  contact  with  masters  who  could  give  me  a  conscious- 
ness of  these  things.  After  I  passed  on  I  used  them  and 
I  felt  that  I  had  gained  (if  I  may  use  the  word)  a  manner 
by  which  I  had  advanced  and  comprehended  and  used 
with  the  strength  of  my  spirit,  this  high  degree  of  knowl- 
edge. 

Passing  on  still  further  I  would  like  to  give  you  a 
thought  with  regard  to  the  placing  of  what  is  known  as 
the  Arch  of  the  Almighty.  This  Arch  is  what  holds,  be- 
fore the  High  Heavens,  its  place,  and  for  every  one  who 
gains  a  knowledge,  it  stands  forth  as  one  of  the  most 
wonderful  constructions  possible  to  be  placed  by  spirit. 

Fourteen  ages  within  the  Seventh  Universe  we  worked 
upon  one  of  its  arches.  There  are  28  of  them.  It  stands 
out  clearly  defined  with  a  background  of  gold  and  blue 

S7 


— the  symbol  of  which  is,  the  holiness  of  the  spirituality 
of  the  Great  Heavens.  Within  every  Arch  are  50  million 
small  particles  of  light  placed  together.  That  light  is 
held  so  precious  that  it  is  only  when  this  was  required, 
was  it  brought  into  existence ;  and  in  no  other  place  in  all 
the  great  creations  of  the  Father  is  there  any  portion  of 
it  save  here. '  This  Arch  measures  over  many  millions  of 
miles,  yet  I  say  unto  thee,  many  times  every  arch  is 
crowded  filled  full  of  the  passing  of  infinite  spirit.  Over, 
as  if  suspended  in  the  atmosphere,  is  what  is  known  as 
the  Wings  of  the  Messengers.  They  are  visible  at  all 
times  and  they  vary  in  14  shades  of  white.  Their  move- 
ment is  like  unto  the  movement  of  some  great  sweep. 
The  measurement  of  it,  above  the  arch,  would  be  accord- 
ing to  human  measurement,  about  1000  miles  wide.  And 
it  is  often  spoken  of  as  the  Wings  of  the  Almighty. 

This  Arch  rests  upon  what  is  known  as  the  founda- 
tions of  the  Great  Heavens.  This,  to  me,  has  never  been 
given  with  regard  to  its  age  or  placement.  I  only  know 
that  we  of  the  Seventh  Universe  made  one  of  the  arches. 
There  are  in  all  over  10,000  of  us  from  the  Seventh  Uni- 
verse who  put  it  together  and  we  put  it  together  with  a 
breath  of  radiant  light.  I  know  you  will  think  all  this 
tremendous  in  its  expression,  but  I  have  done  the  best  I 
could  so  that  you  could  comprehend  me. 

There  are  many  other  foundations,  one  of  which  was 
the  foundation  for  the  physical  sun  that  you  use.  It  is 
rotary  in  its  form  and  is  made  completely  of  fragments 
from  nebulae  that  have  been  dissolved  and  entered  into 
other  nebulae.  It  is  susceptible  only  to  the  use  of  the 
great  discs  of  the  sun. 

The  foundations  for  all  great  intellectual  centers 
w'herein  any  creation  enters,  that  they  may  receive  and 
use  always  such  an  intellect,  are  only  minor  buildings  as 
yoii  might  say,  although  some  are  very,  very  perfect. 


But  they  of  the  Seventh  Universe  seldom  ever  complete 
a  formation,  they  usually  place  foundations  or  portions; 
always  it  is  known  in  the  great  creation  as  a  portion  of 
the  Seventh  Universe,  or  the  Mystic  Seven.  Seals  hold 
usually  a  conscious  thought  of  our  Universe  and  many 
masters  from  our  Universe  carry  these  seals  into  great 
conditions  beyond  which  I,  as  spirit,  have  never  pene- 
trated.   It  has  not  been  my  portion  to  do. 

Coming  down  into  the  earth  thought  of  foundations, 
you  will  find  everywhere  as  the  progress  and  develop- 
ment of  mentality  goes  on,  that  we  of  the  Seventh  Uni- 
verse have  had  the  power  of  placing  not  only  the  founda- 
tions of  many  things,  but  also  that  within  them  we  placed 
that  which  permeated  and  held  always  an  intelligent 
thought,  a  thought  that  was  conscious,  moving  in  unison 
with  its  age  and  holding  the  power  of  developing  what- 
ever it  came  in  contact  with. 

The  archway  of  what  is  known  as  the  Heavens  of 
Earth  forms  a  portion  of  our  great  construction.  Con- 
sequently, we  placed  them  and  they  have  always  moved 
perfectly,  there  has  not  been  one  single  deviation  at  any 
time  to  disturb  the  harmony  of  the  movement  of  elements 
or  any  force  that  came  in  contact  with  it.  The  weight 
of  such  an  arch  is  beyond  measurement  as  far  as  anything 
you  have  to  measure  with  within  earth. 

One  of  the  peculiar  conditions  with  regard  to  this 
construction  is  that  it  is  in  the  shape  of  the  triangle,  yet 
all  who  are  studying  in  a  human  way,  would  say  it  is  a 
perfect  circle.  But  it  is  not.  The  point  of  the  triangle 
rests  upon  the  center  of  the  earth  and  the  arch  of  the 
triangle  supports  the  great  dome  of  the  heavens  of  the 
earth. 

There  is  in  the  center  the  High  Heavens  and  at  either 
extremity  of  the  half  arch  before  it  begins  to  form  a  per- 
fect circle  for  the  lower  portion,  is  again  another  triangle 

89 


and  meets  the  point  in  the  center  of  the  earth,  here  are 
situated  many  heavens  of  different  conditions  and  for 
different  races.  These,  of  course,  hold  seven  that  are 
known  of  man.  There  are,  however,  seven  more  that 
have  not  been  explained. 


QUESTIONS  AND  ANSWERS 

Q.  If  1000  years  is  a  day,  if  I  say  a  million  years,  then 
put  it  in  spiritual  things,  would  bring  it  in  the  365  billion  years? 

A.  Yes.  If  you  try  to  measure  with  thought,  you  will  find 
that  you  bring  it  down  to  a  minimum  which  you  can  calculate 
very  readily  if  you  choose,  making  a  thousand  years  a  day  and 
feel  that  you  can  encircle  a  day  with  one  thought,  that  gives 
you  an  opportunity  to  not  become  bewildered  as  you  try  to 
calculate  and  bring  into  substance  the  higher  thoughts. 

The  form  of  foundation  as  it  separates  itself  would  remind 
you  very  much  of  a  cloud  dispersed  with  the  sun,  separating 
itself  and  then  as  the  light  left  it,  collecting  itself  together. 
That  will  give  you  some  idea  of  the  passing  of  foundations 
into  nebulae  out  of  which  can  come  creations. 

Q.     Why  do  they  use  nebulae  for  creations? 

A.  It  expresses  to  you  the  idea  of  form  for  creation  for 
your  earth  there  is  the  great  nebulae  and  then  there  are  much 
smaller  nebulae,  one  of  which  holds  itself  within  the  arch  of 
the  heavens  and  into  which  is  placed  the  great  stars  that  you 
call  the  Milky  Wae. 

A  nebulae  is  always  endowed  with  certain  amount  of  crea- 
tive power  which  has  a  method  of  attracting  to  it  that  which 
can  be  formed  into  substance  and  become  as  you  say,  solidified, 
condensed. 

A  nebula  really  can  be  so  rarified  that  human  vision  could 
not  see  it  at  all.  There  are  many  things  that  human  vision 
could  not  see  and  you  really  do  not  see  with  the  human  vision 
at  any  time,  it  is  only  the  focusing  of  spiritual  vision  thru  finite 
matter  is  what  eye-sight  really  is.  You  could  not  see  with  mat- 
ter because  matter  has  not  the  power  of  sight;  the  senses  of  the 
soul  prepares  the  same  condition  in  the  aura  of  the  brain  as  a 
nebula  would,  only  very  small,  and  thru  that  the  penetration  of 

90 


spirit  comes  and  you  say,  I  can  see.  If  this  intensifies  and  the 
aura  of  the  brain  becomes  overly  sensitive  then  the  spirit  can 
produce,  thru  human  vision,  what  you  call  a  higher  sight  and 
then  you  can  see  what  is  called  the  invisible. 

Q.     Does  this  lesson  belong  to  Egyptian  history?     Yes. 
You  were  told  to  broaden  and  I  am  trying  to  assist  you. 

Q.  Is  there  any  such  thing  as  spreading  out  too  far  in  the 
physical  thought,  Marcus?  No,  Sir.  Do  you  ever  think  you 
can  do  that? 

Q.  Could  you  become  so  conscious  that  you  would  not  stay 
with  the  physical  any  more?  No.  The  only  thing  that  would 
separate  spirit  from  the  physical  is  when  you  have  completed 
the  full  spiritual  experience  of  earth;  then  you  separate  from 
the  physical.  That  is  the  most  natural  separation  that  you 
can  get?  Yes,  Sir.  Really,  there  is  no  separation,  it  is  only  a 
certain  transition,  that  is,  you  exchange  one  condition  for  an- 
other— it  blends  into  each  other,  just  like  you  dissolve  a  nebula, 
so  you  dissolve  the  body. 


91 


LESSON  IX 


MARCUS— April  17,  1918 

...  I  want  to  give  you  the  Placing  and  the  Explanation 
that  you  have  requested  so  often  as  to  Why,  under  what 
conditions  and  what  was  the  origin  and  connection  be- 
tween the  Seventh  Universe  and  Egypt. 

To  be  sure  I  must  give  you  as  closely  as  I  can  that 
this  may  be  a  perfect  history  for  you,  and  the  best  way 
to  give  it  is  by  describing  scenes,  places  and  personali- 
ties. 

The  origin  of  the  separating  of  higher  masters  into 
rulers  came  about  when  thru  the  condition  of  the  Great 
Heavens  many  were  called  from  out  of  them  to  take  a 
portion  in  the  placing  of  all  great  thoughts  that  they  held 
direct  with  the  Father. 

The  creation  of  universes  to  hold  these  masters  was 
one  among  the  first  great  movements. 

The  numbering  of  them  was  absolutely  a  symbol  of 
the  age  thru  which  they  would  act  and  absolutely  the 
knowledge  contained  within  them  for  certain  ages. 

The  Seventh  Universe  marked  the  great  Mystic  Age 
and  held  the  tie  between  the  Spirit  of  Egypt  and  the  ma- 
terial and  physical  body  of  Egypt. 

Every  habitation  had  to  hold  this  great  condition  of 
Egypt. 

I  began  with  you  in  the  second  habitation  and  tonight 
I  want  to  formulate  for  you  something  of  a  thought,  ii 
words  can  express  it,  with  regard  to  the  first  habitation. 

92 


In  the  creation  of  universes  and  their  numbering,  and 
the  placing  of  masters  within  them,  only  forms,  as  it  were, 
a  fraction  of  the  great  thought.  The  placing  of  earth  and 
the  calling  together  of  earth-created-spirits,  or  they  cre- 
ated for  earth,  holds  only  a  small  portion  of  one  age,  and 
that  will  give  to  the  first  Universe  in  its  numbering,  this 
condition. 

But  when  the  Great  Heavens  were  opened  it  was  then 
that  the  Hosts  of  the  Most  High  came  forth  and  unto 
them  always  is  given  the  placing  of  the  foundations  of 
every  creation.  Out  of  the  number  came  they  who  were 
to  formulate  a  portion  of  the  Seventh  Universe.  When 
I  explain  to  you  with  regard  to  formless,  it  must  be  in 
this  way — that  even  spirit  chooses  no  etheric  condition 
to  form  a  semblance,  for  spirit  viewed  spirit  as  it  was. 
But  in  order  that  you  may  understand,  I  will  place  it 
closer  to  human  thought.  The  majesty  of  the  Infinite 
was  supreme,  the  consciousness  of  spirit  gleamed  and 
glittered  like  a  great  sparkling  light,  universe  after  uni- 
verse clustered  itself,  rays  above  rays;  it  was  not  be- 
cause earth  was  formed,  it  was  not  because  this  was  one 
of  its  habitations,  it  was  because  the  great  age  in  which 
these  creations  were  placed,  was  forming  itself  for  the 
history  that  should  follow.  Even  then  what  would  be 
called  the  Egypt  of  the  Formless  was  there,  and  in  a. 
way  in  which  you  can  understand  it,  I  will  say  it  was  a 
city  of  the  gods,  for  it  held  invisible  light,  a  light  that 
the  earth  hath  never  had  the  power  to  attract.  And  in 
the  midst  of  it  was  the  cloud  that  held  the  voice  of  the 
Father.  And  thru  this  came,  as  it  were,  the  first  con- 
scious placing  of  Egypt,  and  in  this  thought  it  meant  the 
Knowledge  that  should  abide  thru  universe,  thru  time, 
thru  space  and  thru  immensity.  In  this  you  must  trace 
out  the  highest  thought  that  you  possibly  can.  And  in 
this  Knowledge  they  of  the   Great  Heavens   formed  a 

93 


part.  Then  it  was  that  it  was  decided  that  each  age  in 
which  Egypt  should  be,  should  be  counted,  not  only  for 
its  knowledge,  but  for  its  form,  for  its  mathematical  dis- 
tinction, for  its  wonderful  history,  for  its  royalty  and  for 
its  method  of  government.  In  this  you  will  follow  on 
thru  many  ages  and  in  this  condition  gleams  forth  the 
highest  condition  of  its  magnificance  and  purity,  for  not 
one  portion  of  it  in  any  way  held  aught  else.  If  I  should 
describe  it  there  are  few  words  that  would  do  justice  to 
it.  Man  has  attempted  in  many  ways  to  grasp  the  idea 
and  make  something  that  would  resemble  it. 

The  first  great  condition  of  its  Knowledge  was  that 
•there  should  be  within  the  space  of  form  two  great  con- 
ditions of  Egypt ;  one  should  be  in  the  second  habitation 
of  the  material  earth,  and  the  third  should  be  in  the  third 
habitation  of  material  earth. 

The  holding  of  this  knowledge  for  every  age  should 
have  its  origin  in  this  time  and  place  of  the  first  habita- 
tion. The  manner  in  which  this  should  be  kept  would 
be  between  the  Great  Heavens  and  the  High  Heavens, 
and  if  you  search  for  the  first  Egypt  that  was  established 
you  will  find  it  there. 

The  movement  of  the  universes  was  decided  with  re- 
gard to  it  and  up  to  the  14th  Universe  they  were  to  pass 
this  wonderful  condition  of  Egypt  once  in  every  five 
thousand  years.  This  placed  the  masters  of  the  7th  very 
close  to  the  beginning  of  the  great  ages  and  I  will  say 
for  you,  that  the  7th  Universe  was  the  one  that  passed 
in  the  35,(XX)th  age  in  the  history  of  Egypt.  This  gives 
you  a  plain  thought  with  regard  to  its  age.  This  leaves 
you  in  the  7th  Universe  in  the  7th  Age  of  Egypt. 

The  Call  from  out  the  Great  Heavens  was  made  before 
the  establishment  of  the  thought  of  earth,  and  the  prepa- 
ration was  made  to  answer.     And  if  human  thought  asks 

94 


the  question,  your  answer  can  be,  that  this  is  the  Origin 
of  the  Thought  of  Human  Knowledge. 

The  formation  of  what  was  to  produce  the  ideal  of 
man's  knowledge  was  only  placed  when  the  7th  Universe 
made  its  transit  within  the  orbit  of  the  first  condition 
of  Egypt.  Many  times  humanity  has  reared  a  structure 
and  considered  they  have  established  a  limited  time  for 
the  division  of  many  things,  particularly  the  form  that  all 
things  must  take;  but  the  decision  of  the  formation  of 
universes,  planets,  worlds  and  spheres  was  not  made 
until  the  5th  Universe  entered  the  orbit  of  the  first  con- 
dition of  Egypt,  looking  upon  Egypt  as  the  point  of 
knowledge. 

Unity  formed  the  first  great  thought  in  the  move- 
ment of  this  Egypt,  and  in  it  was  the  perfect  harmony 
that  has  never  been  understood  save  by  spirit  alone. 
When  the  Call  was  made  that  the  earth  should  be,  then 
began  the  wonderful  transition  wherein  the  form  of  all 
these  conditions  that  had  been  created  and  understood  by 
masters  of  all  universes  began  to  be  placed  within  the 
outlines  of  the  orbit  wherein  the  earth  was  placed. 

In  the  division  among  the  masters  as  to  what  portion 
should  be  their  part  to  perform  when  Egypt  should  be- 
come a  portion  of  the  second  habitation,  is  where  you, 
within  the  7th  Universe,  grasped,  as  it  were,  the  great 
Law  that  always  has  been  within  the  7th  Universe. 
There  was  strength,  unity,  method  and  the  highest  math- 
ematical calculation  possible  for  you  to  hold.  Here  it 
was  that  the  origin  of  the  building  of  the  Temple  was 
first  begun,  for  had  you  not  entered  from  out  the  Great 
Heavens  to  the  7th  Universe  and  had  you  not  compre- 
hended the  knowledge  of  Egypt?  And  if  age  and  time 
according  to  human  thought  was  what  was  needed,  it 
certainly  had  been  given.  Here  it  was  that  the  estab- 
lishment of  a  ruler  for  old  predynastic  Egypt  originated. 

95 


It  did  not  come  from  precedent  or  from  superior  placing ; 
it  came  thru  the  knowledge  of  the  Flame  Oath  that  was 
given  unto  the  first  to  hold  control  of  Egypt  within  the 
second  habitation.  There  is  no  conscious  word  or 
thought  that  can  express  the  meaning  of  what  comes 
within  that  as  it  passes  from  the  Father  to  the  spirit. 

Following  within  the  creation  of  the  cycle  then  did 
they  seek  expression  and  form  of  spirit  that  they  might 
hold  a  place  within  Egypt  within  the  second  habitation. 

Now  I  will  follow  down  for  you  and  say  unto  you 
that  old  predynastic  Egypt  formed  the  first  portion  of 
the  habitation  and  was  the  foundation  for  all  that  fol- 
lowed thru  the  ages  of  the  known  earth.  Here  the  com- 
prehension of  form  become,  as  it  were,  available  for  the 
use  of  spirit  in  a  marked  degree.  It  grew  more  rapidly 
than  the  third  habitation  has  ever  grown,  on  account  of 
the  purity  of  its  placing. 

If  I  should  say  to  you  that  Egypt  was  one  city,  I 
would  not  express  to  you  what  it  was.  But  old  predy- 
nastic Egypt  covered  a  large  area  of  the  earth  and  within 
it  were  seven  large  cities,  larger  than  any  habitation  that 
has  followed  it  later.  In  this  everything  reached  a  won- 
drous height  of  perfection.  And  there  is  no  creation  in 
the  third  habitation  that  was  any  finer,  more  perfect  and 
more  highly  developed  in  the  first  habitation  than  it  has 
ever  been  in  this. 

The  first  great  ruling  power,  as  it  were,  was  arranged 
in  different  collections  of  personalities,  not  as  a  leader, 
not  as  a  power  to  rule,  but  as  an  equal  conscious  thought 
giving  forth  knowledge.  Naturally  the  masters  from  the 
Great  Heavens  that  had  taken  their  place  within  the 
universes,  form  the  ones  that  could  most  easily  do  this. 
There  were  many  things  to  be  overcome,  such  as  in  the 
beginning  of  it,  the  reduction  of  immensity  of  form  into 
sufficient  delicacy  for  the  use  of  spirit.     Many  times  spirit 

96 


took  upon  itself  the  action  and  the  development  of  all 
this,  but  gradually  as  it  grew  into  a  more  perfect  rela- 
tionship, it  was  easily  accomplished.  The  interchange 
of  both  visible  and  invisible  bodies  was  not  unusual.  The 
placing  of  material  even  into  forms  could  be  as  readily 
accomplished  by  masters  who  had  no  material  bodies  as 
well  as  they  who  had  chosen  to  use  them.  Their  first 
great  form  of  worship  was  very  simple,  but  very  plain. 
They  worshipped  in  a  unity  of  thought  the  Source  from 
whence  they  came.  They  utilized  all  the.  forces  and 
powers  of  light,  making  them  conform  to  whatever  was 
needful  to  be  done  with  them.  The  language  was  most 
pure  in  every  way  and  could  be  used  both  silently  and 
otherwise.  One  of  the  highest  conditions  of  their  per- 
fection was  where  everything  moved  noiselessly,  it  pro- 
duced a  more  harmonious  vibration  and  did  not  exclude 
the  finer  sounds  that  were  not  discordant  to  the  human 
personality  or  physical  condition. 

I  have  something  in  regard  to  this  that  I  would  like 
to  tell  you. 

One  of  the  great  cities  was  named  Othodoc ;  it  lay 
within  the  great  plains  that  you  have  never  known  of, 
for  the  sea  between  you  and  the  eastern  continent  lay  to 
the  north  and  south,  instead  of  to  the  east  and  west,  and 
this  city  was  there.  The  magnificence  of  it  was  beyond 
anything  that  earth  hath  held  since.  Every  available 
condition  for  comfort,  ease  and  beauty  was  used.  He 
whose  work  it  was  to  know  that  each  one  within  that 
large  city  was  not  only  comfortable,  but  happy,  was  a 
small-like  form  of  a  man,  delicate  and  fragile.  He  had 
descended  from  one  of  the  great  masters  who  called  from 
out  the  different  universes  they  who  were  to  succeed 
each  other.  This  one  was  from  the  Sixth  Universe,  and 
here  it  is  that  you  sought  a  consciousness  that  you  might 
have  a  realization  of  how  high  humanity  could  place  the 

97 


knowledge  given  unto  them.  With  you  were  they  whom 
thou  hast  always  loved  and  if  I  say  unto  you  that  the 
bond  of  brotherhood  within  those  of  the  7th  Universe  is 
very  strong,  I  know  you  will  understand  me.  The  name 
of  this  one  was  Pharaoh,  but  it  was  not  pronounced  as 
it  is  at  the  present,  but  that  you  may  understand,  we  will 
leave  it  as  it  is.  You  came  unto  him  and  there  were 
seven  of  us  together,  and  he  asked  us  to  remain  some 
time  as  he  wished  us  to  see  this  beautiful  city.*  We 
went  everywhere.  The  movement  and  the  product  of 
what  they  created  was  one  of  the  most  marvelous  pro- 
ductions of  the  earth.  Everything  was  produced  by  they 
who  worked  with  it  in  order  that  it  might  be  as  perfect 
as  they  could  make  it.  There  was  no  question,  no  hurry, 
no  forcing,  each  one  chose  what  they  loved  to  do  the 
best  and  did  it  that  it  should  be  perfect.  Among  they 
of  his  household  were  three  who  had  come  to  him,  not 
in  a  physical  way,  but  in  the  way  of  spirit.  One  was  she 
who  had  dwelt  within  the  6th  Universe  and  thou  hast  a 
slight  knowledge  of  her.  She  held  no  physical  form, 
but  an  etheric  body,  and  she  went  everywhere  giving 
forth  her  knowledge  of  what  might  form  for  them  a 
higher  ideal  of  perfection.f 

The  other  one  was  one  who  seemed  to  hold  a  con- 
scious knowledge  of  the  coming  of  the  Divine  Master 
as  she  had  come  from  the  9th  Universe.  And  it  was  thru 
her  that  the  formation  in  the  second  habitation  of  the 
Silver  Brotherhood  was  placed. 

Many  there  were  among  those  who  inhabited  this 
city  that  were  found  worthy  to  receive  the  Silver  Corslet. 


♦Were  these  seven  the  Brotherhood  of  the  7th  Universe? 
Yes. 

tWas  she  who  afterwards  was  my  sister  in  the  physical? 
Yes. 


And  if  you  were  taken  into  the  great  conditions  that  lie 
beyond  even  the  spheres,  you  would  find  them  still  wear- 
ing the  Silver  Corslet. 

The  third  one  took  a  more  human  thought  and  held 
a  physical  condition  close  enough  that  she  might  place 
the  knowledge  of  perfect  form  for  they  whose  children 
were  to  form  the  generation  succeeding  them. 

In  all  this  you  must  remember,  if  memory  brings  you 
any  thought,  that  there  necessarily  had  to  be  places 
where  these  instructions  were  to  be  received.  They  were 
usually  within  open  courtyards  of  the  temple ;  some- 
times, however,  they  were  in  the  big  courts  of  the  palace 
of  he  who  guided  and  controlled  them.  It  was  during 
one  of  these  great  times  that  the  first  conscious  expres- 
sion of  the  Divine  Master  was  made  for  them.  To  be 
sure  it  had  been  many,  many  ages  since  the  world,  or 
the  earth  as  you  called  it,  had  been  established,  and  if 
any  knowledge  of  mine  can  be  given  you,  I  would  say 
unto  you  that  I  cannot  tell  you  how  many  times  the 
Divine  Master  had  been  to  earth.  This  particular  time 
was  noted  for  the  supremacy  for  old  predynastic  Egypt. 
It  marked,  as  it  were,  its  finality  of  earth.  Just  as  at  the 
present  the  coming  of  the  Divine  Master  marked  the 
finality  of  the  age  of  the  earth. 

Many  of  course,  were  the  things  that  followed  even 
that,  as  it  has  with  you.  But  in  this  great  event  in  which 
you  as  spirit  took  part,  there  was  this  given  that  has  re- 
mained with  me  consciously,  for  I  did  not  lose  it  even 
when  I  chose  a  physical  body,  for  as  you  know,  it  was 
very  close  to  the  age  in  which  the  Divine  Master  made 
his  visit  to  the  third  habitation.  He  Appeared,  is  the 
word  that  I  can  use.  There  was  no  heralding  of  His 
coming.  To  be  sure  the  purity  of  both  time  and  condi- 
tion was  as  harmonious  as  would  be  needed.  And  He 
appeared.      Throngs   gathered   everywhere   to   welcome 

99 


Him  and  He  went  among  those  people.  The  number 
of  days  that  He  remained  in  this  one  city  was  only  five, 
but  during  that  time  there  was  not  one  single  personality 
that  did  not  greet  Him  in  some  particular  way.  Before 
He  was  ready  to  go,  you  met  with  Him  within  the  great 
Hall  of  the  one  who  was  with  you.  Everywhere  shone 
forth  the  grandeur  and  the  perfection  and  the  harmonies 
of  both  color  and  formation  and  architecture ;  everything 
available  that  knowledge  could  produce  was  there.  But 
the  Master  stood  a  simple,  beautiful  figure  amidst  it  all. 
He  spake  with  you  as  He  had  done  many  times  and  His 
words  were  these:  "Thou  hast  reached,  O  Egypt,  thy 
place  amid  the  higher  conditions  of  My  Father,  time  it 
will  take  by  which  and  thru  which  your  people  prepare 
themselves  that  they  may  be  not  of  earth."  Many  were 
the  questions  asked  Him  and  many  were  the  answers 
given.  One  that  you  asked  I  will  give  unto  you.  You 
said  unto  Him :  "Master,  Thou  knowest  I  build  a  Tem- 
ple, Thou  knowest  its  foundation  and  its  place.  Giveth 
Thou  unto  me  this  thought — when  in  the  finishing  of  it 
all  where  will  I  find  the  most  beautiful  place  for  it?" 
With  a  loving  expression  and  a  tenderness  that  belonged 
unto  Him,  He  said  unto  thee:  "Master,  thou  shalt 
know,  for  I  shall  call  together  they  who  shall  have  need 
to  worship  within  it.  And  when  Mine  earth  hath  felt 
the  glory  of  the  Father,  thou  shalt  see  thy  temple  finished 
and  used."  "For,"  He  said,  "knowest  thou  not  that  no 
temple  is  worthy  of  they  who  entereth  save  that  it  hath 
the  glory  of  the  Father  within  it."  In  this  I  am  leading 
you  that  you  may  become  conscious  of  the  wonderful 
history  and  the  meaning  of  Egypt. 

Once  again  I  came  with  thee  into  the  third  habitation 
and  among  they  who  gathered  with  us  in  the  palace  was 
one  who  was  always  known  as  Melchior,  the  Egyptian. 
He  was  a  master  of  the  14th  Universe.     He  held  the 

100 


knowledge  of  the  Double  Mystic  Cirdfe^^.H-jef  it  .A/r^S'' ^^Ko'. 
knew  when  the  coming  of  the  Master  would  be  and  when 
He  would  have  to  go  to  Jerusalem.  And  long  he  talked 
with  us  with  regard  to  those  conditions  that  were  to  be. 
He  showed  us  the  movement  of  the  highest  condition 
possible  where  spirit,  inculcated  all  movements  with  the 
highest  force  that  it  is  known  to  have.  He  was  who 
had  great  power  he  could  hold  a  physical  body  inanimate 
for  hundreds  of  years.  He  could  produce  vital  forces 
and  life  within  physical.  And  he  was  older  than  you 
even.  In  appearance  he  was  not  wholly  Egyptian,  but 
he  had  many  of  the  wonderful  characteristics  of  them 
as  far  as  form  and  looks  were  concerned.  He  chose  many 
times  to  go  as  a  high  potentate  for  as  far  as  the  wealth 
of  the  world  was  concerned,  he  could  command  all  that 
he  desired  at  any  time. 

All  this,  of  course,  formed  a  great  condition  and  a 
great  thought  within  the  material  portions  of  the  earth. 
For  if  you  will  think  a  moment  you  will  realize  that  all 
this  impression  and  symbol  had  to  be  placed  in  the 
atmosphere  that  it  might  penetrate  and  place  an  influence 
upon  the  atoms  of  the  earth.  It  was  during  this  condi- 
tion that  he  gave  to  you,  as  a  master,  this  thought,  and 
you  will  realize  as  you  look  back  upon  your  portion  of 
physical  life,  the  true  meaning  of  what  he  told  you.  He 
said:  "You  will  seek  physical  life,  but  you  will  seek 
no  particular  knowledge  within  it,  but  when  knowledge 
comes  to  you,  you  will  drink  it  as  you  would  drink  the 
waters  of  a  fountain  that  is  cool  and  clear  and  sweet. 
Many  will  be  the  things  that  you  will  do.  One  of  them 
is,  that  we  will  give  you  a  portion  to  hold  wherein  a 
Disciple  of  the  Father  shall  place  a  conscious  thought." 


101 


-  ^';  yV-J  IQUESTIDHS  AND  ANSWERS 

Q.     The  thought  of  human  knowledge  was  the  call  of  the 
masters  from  the  Great  Heavens? 
A.     Yes. 

Q.  Do  you  mean  this  as  a  human  condition  or  spiritual 
condition? 

A.     I  am  making  it  plain  enough  for  a  human  history. 

Q.  Do  you  mean  that  the  knowledge  of  the  Father  as  wc 
can  comprehend  it  thru  the  conditions  of  Egypt  began  as  spirit 
understood  the  Flame  Oath  from  the  Father? 

A.     Yes,  Egypt  represents  Knowledge. 

Q.  Marcus,  in  all  this,  it  seems  to  me  as  if  you  were  only 
repeating  what  has  already  occurred — is  it  so? 

A.  Yes,  but  I  am  weaving  together  the  past  history  of 
Egypt  and  placing  it  that  it  may  be  understood  by  they  who 
knew  Egypt  and  holding  the  comparison  for  the  present  time. 

Q.     Was  Melchoir  created  for  earth? 

A.  No,  he  was  created  to  hold  a  portion  like  a  symbolical 
placing  within  the  earth,  but  he  was  not  created  to  hold  a  physi- 
cal body.     He  was  created  a  Holy  Master. 

Q.  Is  that  the  name  of  the  Holy  Master  that  comes  in 
touch  with  us  once  in  a  while? 

Yes,  Melchoir  and  the  Holy  Master  who  comes  here  are 
one  and  the  same. 

The  Holy  Master,  like  the  Divine  Master,  had  many  con- 
sciousnesses of  earth?  If  you  will  stop  and  think,  you  will  real- 
ize that  in  spirit,  that  is  a  master,  has  a  consciousness  of  earth 
as  many  times  as  you  are  conscious  of  the  coming  of  a  new 
day,  if  you  chose  to  open  your  eyes  and  see  it.  You  know 
spirit  often  is  called  to  go  into  heights  and  depths  of  conscious- 
ness and  knowledge  that  the  earth  could  form  no  portion  of  in 
any  way,  but  as  you  are  within  the  earth,  as  you  are  created 
to  come  to  earth,  as  you  hold  a  great  work  within  the  earth,  we 
strive  in  this  knowledge  to  place  everything  so  that  you  can  be 
conscious  of  the  meaning  of  the  earth,  its  creations  and  its 
placing. 

102 


There  had  to  be  those  great  masters  that  were  not  created 
for  earth  that  were  much  older,  to  place  these  great  thoughts 
and  laws?  Yes,  like  a  family  where  the  older  ones  become 
conscious  first  and  then  it  is  transferred  to  the  younger  ones. 
One  father,  one  family. 

Marcus,  says,  you  may  call  this:  The  Origin  of  the  Knowl- 
edge of  Egypt. 

Q.  Predynastic  Egypt  is  the  knowledge  that  was  brought 
forth  that  was  used  then  and  placed  for  earth  before  there  was 
an  Egyptian  ruler? 

A.  Yes.  The  origin  of  all  things,  whether  it  be  thought 
or  otherwise,  is  first  within  spirit  form,  then  in  ether  form,  then 
in  what  you  would  call  the  embodiment  of  form,  coming  closer 
and  closer;  and  last  but  not  least,  comes  the  physical  expression 
of  it. 

Q.  What  represents  the  tie  between  the  predynastic  and 
present  Egypt? 

A.  The  tie  between  the  predynastic  and  the  present  Egypt 
is  the  Conscious  Thought.  That,  of  course,  never  can  be  ex- 
tinguished, because  it  has  never  been  unconscious,  it  has  always 
been  alive,  vitalized  and  concious. 

Marcus  carries  with  him  a  small  axe,  it  is  not  like  anything 
I  have  ever  seen  in  the  form  of  an  axe;  it  has  a  wing  like  a  half 
moon  and  it  comes  down  to  a  point  and  the  wooden  hammer  fits 
in  the  round  part.  It  is  highly  polished.  He  says,  they  use 
that  in  portraying  force  and  power.  It  portrayed  the  thought 
of  force  and  power  which  they  did  not  use  in  the  second  habita- 
tion.    It  was  the  symbol  of  it. 

His  robes.  He  wears  a  very  dark  shade  of  green,  with 
glints  of  silver  and  red  thru  it.  It  represents  Knowledge,  the 
birth  and  the  holding  of  the  every-present  Knowledge.  If  I 
should  tell  you  that  the  origin  of  this  robe  was  when  our  Uni- 
verse first  made  its  movement  from  out  the  great  ether  Circle, 
where  it  felt  that  it  was  available  for  our  use.  Now  do  not 
begin  to  calculate  how  long  ago  that  was  because  I  would 
prefer  to  not  tell  you,  for  it  would  make  you  feel  as  if  I  was 
one  of  the  ancients. 

Who  created  the  7th  Universe?  The  masters,  the  seven 
masters  that  came  from  out  the  Great  Universe  created  the 
7th  universe. 

103 


Q.  Is  that  Great  Universe  where  these  masters  come  from 
where  the  Great  Brotherhood  belongs? 

A.  Yes.  If  you  utilize  the  knowledge  that  has  been  created 
for  spirit  you  will  have  reached  a  great  height  and  will  be  able 
to  understand  the  meaning  of  the  place  wherein  the  Great 
Brotherhood  dwelleth.  I  know  there  are  those  who  think  they 
understand  how  to  reach  even  beyond  their  creation,  but  there 
are  depths  and  heights  unexplored,  and  we,  as  masters,  dearly 
love  to  give  you  from  time  to  time  a  leaf,  a  blossom,  a  thought 
or  even  a  promise  that  reveals  to  you  what  still  is  there  for  you. 
I  used  to,  when  I  had  a  physical  body  and  a  physical  mother, 
ask  her  to  please  allow  me  to  make  my  way  into  the  cellars 
that  they  had  because  I  knew  I  would  find  there  what  I  did  not 
know  was  there.  If  you  had  seen  me  when  I  escaped  from  the 
prison,  you  would  have  thought  that  I  was  more  like  some  boys 
than  some  others. 

I  hope  you  will  be  able  to  understand  it  for  there  was  no 
other  way  to  tell  this  to  you  except  the  way  I  have. 


104 


LESSON  X 


MARCUS— July  9.  1918 

Well,  Marcus,  what  knowledge  have  you  to  give  me 
tonight? 

There  are  many  things,  many  things,  and  glad  I  am 
that  I  can  give  it  unto  you,  for  thou  knowest  that  it  is 
not  only  the  words,  but  the  meaning  of  them  that  liveth 
so  far  above  the  thought  of  man ;  and  I  wouldst  give  it  to 
thee  that  thou  shouldst  place  thy  memory  that  holdeth 
itself  within  thy  spirit  and  connecteth  itself  with  thy 
physical  thought,  that  thou  couldst  follow  out  and  read 
the  meaning  of  the  many  symbols  that  are  within  Egypt. 
Tonight  I  want  to  tell  you,  for  it  is  needful  that  thou 
shouldst  know,  that  three  times  hath  they  of  the  7th 
Universe  stood  and  placed  what  was  to  be  within  the 
foundations  of  the  earth,  and  thou  placed  within  the 
Third  Universe  the  knowledge  that  thou  didst  learn  be- 
fore thou  Cometh  into  Egypt  that  was.  And  I  wouldst 
tell  thee  of  the  first  establishment  of  the  Mystic  Circle 
and  how  even,  as  spirit,  thou  must  be  prepared  to  enter 
it.  Thou  knowest  it  hath  been  told  about,  and  thou 
knowest  it  was  within  the  third  habitation  wherein  they 
called  forth  the  Spirit  of  Egypt  that  it  might  give  unto 
them  that  which  was  to  be  within  the  future  ages.  So 
I  say  unto  thee  that  when  the  preparation  was  to  be 
made  for  the  creation  of  the  Mystic  Circle,  many  and 
great  were  the  things  that  were  brought  together. 

105 


First,  there  must  be  a  Light,  such  as  transcends  all 
other  lights  and  it  must  come  from  the  highest  source 
wherein  the  spirit  could  procure  it,  and  it  must  be  ever- 
lasting and  it  must  be  worthy  of  that  which  is  placed 
within  it.  And  there  were  fourteen  masters;  seven  of 
them  came  together  from  the  North  and  seven  of  them 
came  from  the  South,  within  immensity.  And  the  seven 
that  came  from  the  North  were  divided,  and  three  of 
them  came  from  the  7th  Universe  and  three  came  from 
the  Vibrant  Universe,  and  one  came  from  the  Universe 
of  Thought. 

And  there  were  seven  from  the  South,  three  came 
from  the  Universe  of  Color  and  three  came  from  the 
Universe  of  Immensity,  and  one  came  from  the  Universe 
of  the  Circle. 

And  they  came  together  wherein  the  great  light  pene- 
trated and  they  stood  within  what  is  known  as  the  Holy 
Place  and  then  they  understood  that  they  must  be  pre- 
pared, and  they  cast  aside  the  mantles  they  had  worn 
and  they  placed  upon  themselves  white  mantles  lined  in- 
side with  the  color  of  gold,  and  around  their  neck  they 
placed  the  chain  wherein  were  the  golden  stones.  And 
there  they  waited  and  they  had  no  shoes  upon  their  feet. 
And  when  all  was  ready,  they  asked  that  there  might  be 
given  them  the  right  to  bring  together  this  light  that  it 
might  form  within  the  Temple  of  Egypt  the  Mystic 
Circle.*  And  while  yet  they  waited,  there  came  unto  them 
one  who  was  the  Holy  Master  and  he  claimeth  no  portion 
within  the  earth  or  without  the  earth,  for  he  dwelleth 
alone  in  the  Holy  Place.  And  he  said  unto  them :  "Thou 
shalt  be  known  as  they  who  hold  a  place  within  the 
brotherhoods  of  creation  and  thou  shalt  gather  this  light 


♦Is  this  the  Temple  of  Egypt  in  the  5th  Sphere? 
Yes. 

106 


together  and  thou  shalt  number  it  according  to  the  num- 
bers of  thy  mastership.  And  there  were  fourteen  mas- 
ters, and  one  master  who  came  from  the  Circle  Universe 
said  unto  him:  "I  holdeth  a  mastership  of  28."  Then 
he  said :  "Thy  portion  shall  be  divided  into  28  portions 
and  thou  shalt  know  that  it  shall  form  four  times  the 
seven- (th)  circle  and  four  times  it  shall  move  ere  thou 
placeth  thy  one  portion  within  the  Circle."  And  another 
said :  "Master,  I  holdeth  only  a  mastership  of  two  great 
conditions."  And  then  he  said  unto  him:  "Thou  shalt 
make  thy  portion  in  two  and  one  shall  go  to  the  center 
and  one  shall  follow  the  tracing  of  the  Circle,  but  when 
thou  hast  finished,  thou  shalt  take  thy  portion  and  it  shall 
be  one-half  of  the  Circle."  And  one  said:  "Master,  I 
hold  a  mastership  only  of  one  great  condition."  Then 
He  said :  "Thou  shalt  trace  the  circle  with  thy  line  of 
thought  and  thou  shalt  make  it  even  and  thou  shalt  make 
it  perfect." 

So  according  to  each  one  they  were  given  their  por- 
tion of  the  great  light  that  they  were  to  take  unto 
Egypt  to  form  the  Circle  that  should  be  known  as  the 
Circle  of  the  Great  Mystic  Light.  And  when  they  were 
ready  they  each  one  covered  their  raiment  with  the  rai- 
ment they  had  worn  when  they  came  together ;  and  they 
each  went  according  to  their  place.  They  who  were  to 
go  to  the  center,  went  thither;  and  they  who  were  to 
go  to  the  south,  went  thither.  And  the  Holy  Master 
taketh  within  his  hands  a  shuttle  and  within  the  shuttle 
were  two  threads ;  one  was  gold  and  one  was  silver ;  and 
he  wove  back  and  forth,  and  then  the  masters  came  to- 
gether unto  Egypt  and  they  met  within  the  great  Tem- 
ple, and  they  saw  within  the  center  of  the  Temple  within 
the  room  that  had  been  prepared,  a  tiny  weaving  of 
threads  and  then  they  began  to  place  their  Circle  around 
it  and  each  portion  was  fitted  and  each  portion  belonged 

107 


together  and  they  folded  and  closed  it  and  cemented  it 
and  it  became  perfect  thru  truth  and  thru  knowledge  and 
thru  that  which  belongeth  unto  them  from  he  who  is  the 
Holy  Master.  Then  it  was  that  they  must  choose  wno 
should  be  the  one  who  would  first  be  able  to  see  and 
understand  what  cometh  unto  them  within  the  Mystic 
Circle.  So  there  were  seven  chosen  and  seven  times 
the  great  movement  of  all  their  Universes  did  they  wait 
until  they  were  made  perfect  enough  to  stand  without 
the  Circle  and  then  they  chose  the  garments  they  should 
wear  and  they  were  made  of  that  which  gave  them  a 
mastership  within  their  Universe.  And  unto  them  it 
was  given  according  to  the  Law  of  their  Universe.  And 
the  first  that  came  unto  them  within  the  Mystic  Circle 
was  a  flame  of  light  and  it  burned  and  it  deepened  and  it 
formed  a  smoke  that  rose  high  within  the  Temple  and 
disappeared  and  they  knew  that  their  Circle  was  blessed 
by  the  influence  of  the  breath  of  the  Flame  Oath.  And 
from  that  on  each  one,  according  to  his  place  and  his 
mastership,  went  unto  the  Temple  at  Egypt  and  within 
the  Mystic  Circle  came  they  from  great  heights,  greater 
heights  than  even  you  of  the  7th  Universe  hath  any 
knowledge  of.  And  some  brought  them  the  knowledge 
of  life  such  as  was  to  be  and  such  as  had  been.*  And 
many  understood  not  the  symbol  thereof.  And  many 
there  were  who  questioned  one  with  the  other. 

Thou  and  I  were  among  they  who  were  to  come  last 
and  thou  saith  unto  me:  "How  long  thinkest  thou  we 
shall  wait?"  And  I  said  unto  thee :  "I  know  not."  But 
we  waited  until  the  7th  day  at  the  7th  hour  and  then  we 
went  unto  the  Temple,  and  they  showed  us  a  great  pillar 
and  upon  the  pillar  was  a  flame  and  beneath  the  pillar 


♦What  kind  of  life? 
Eternal  life. 

108 


was  an  arch,  and  it  was  lifted  high  above  the  Mystic 
Circle  and  it  was  lowered  beneath  the  Mystic  Circle,  and 
the  symbols  there  upon  it  were  plain  and  clear.  And 
thou  saith:  "What  thinkest  thou?"  And  a  loud  voice 
spake  unto  us:  "These  are  the  symbols  that  shall  be 
used  by  they  who  shall  dwell  in  Egypt  when  it  shall  be 
within  the  earth,  and  from  out  of  it  shall  be  taken  that 
which  shall  form  the  language  and  the  words  for  every 
known  race  that  shall  be  upon  the  face  of  the  earth." 
And  the  pillar  was  covered  over,  while  yet  we  looked 
upon  it,  with  a  veil  of  light,  and  thou  saith :  "Why  cov- 
ereth  they  the  words  that  shall  be  for  men?"  And  the 
same  voice  spake  and  said  unto  thee :  "Thou  art  a  mas- 
ter of  the  7th  Universe.  Thou  hast  builded  well.  Why 
asketh  thou  this?"  And  yet  again  the  voice  spake  unto 
us  and  it  said :  "The  words  of  man  shall  be  covered  and 
they  shall  not  be  understood,  but  when  the  veil  of  men- 
tality is  lifted,  then  shall  they  be  full  of  spirit." 

Then  they  showed  us  a  high  mountain  iind  upon  the 
top  of  the  mountain  was  a  pillar  white  like  unto  snow 
and  it  melted  away  and  from  it  flowed  forth  a  rapid 
stream  of  clear  water.  And  I  saith  :  "What  is  the  mean- 
ing?" And  there  came  one  who  saith:  "It  is  that 
which  shall  heal  and  shall  bless  wherever  thou  goest, 
thou  who  art  one  of  the  7th  Universe." 

And  again  they  showed  us  a  wonderful  circle  and 
within  it  was  a  cycle,  and  it  grew  and  there  came  forth 
many  from  out  of  it.  And  the  last  that  came  out  of  it 
were  three ;  one  was  clothed  in  white,  and  one  in  blue 
and  one  in  orange.  And  thou  saith:  "Who  art  they?" 
And  the  voice  answered  and  said :  "One  shall  establish 
the  White  Brotherhood,  one  shall  establish  the  Blue 
Brotherhood,  and  one  shall  establish  the  Orange  Broth- 
erhood ;  and  the  first  shall  be  last  and  the  last  shall  be 
first.     For  he  who  is  the  Orange  Brotherhood  that  com- 

109 


eth  forth  last  shall  be  the  first  to  unloose  the  unconscious- 
ness of  all  things.  And  he  who  cometh  first  shall  hold 
the  place  of  purity  and  that  shall  be  for  He  who  marketh 
the  ways  of  man.  And  he  who  was  to  be  known  as  the 
Blue  Brotherhood  shall  hold  for  the  last  days  the  spirit- 
ual mentality  of  man." 

Then  they  showed  us  a  circle  and  within  the  circle 
was  a  dark  spot  and  the  dark  spot  grew  and  moved  and 
pushed  itself  thru  clouds  of  smoke,  and  it  remained  that 
way  until  around  and  about  it  shone  many  points  of 
light,  and  then  thou  saith:  "It  is  that  which  is  to  be, 
that  which  must  be  created  upon  whom  must  be  placed 
a  weight  and  a  shadow  until  the  light  breaketh  thru."* 

Many  were  the  things  that  were  to  be  done  and  we 
went  our  way  from  out  of  the  palace  and  we  sought  out 
he  who  was  to  have  come  with  us.  And  thou  saith  when 
we  cometh  into  the  quiet  of  our  own  dwelling:  "I 
wouldst  that  Imhotep  shouldst  know  these  things  that 
he  might  make  a  record  of  it."  And  I  said  unto  thee: 
"Lookest  thou  upon  thy  robe."  And  all  things  that  had 
been  shown  us,  and  the  meaning  of  it,  were  upon  thy 
robe  in  gold  and  silver  figures.  And  thou  didst  call  unto 
thee  a  messenger  and  thou  didst  say :  "I  wouldst  that 
thou  shouldst  go  and  when  thou  findest  Imhotep  say 
unto  him  I  needeth  him."  And  he  went  his  way  and 
Imhotep  came  unto  thee  and  thou  saith  unto  him :  "Make 
thou  a  record."  And  thou  tookest  off  thy  robe  and  spread 
it  upon  the  floor  and  Imhotep  began  to  make  a  record 
according  to  the  way  that  he  knew.  And  when  he  had 
finished  there  was  only  an  imprint  here  and  there  of  what 
had  been  upon  thy  robe.  And  then  Imhotep  said  unto 
thee:    "What  wouldst  thou  have  me  do  with  this?"    And 


♦Was  this  the  earth? 
Yes. 

110 


then  thou  saith  unto  him :  "I  wouldst  that  thou  shouldst 
go  with  me,  and  Marcus,  remaineth  thou  here,  keep  thou 
a  guard,  for  I  wouldst  leave  my  robe  with  thee."  And 
thou  puttest  on  a  grey  robe  and  thou  girt  thyself  around 
and  about  with  many  stones  of  white,  blue  and  orange 
and  green  and  purple  and  thou  foldest  within  thy  bosom 
all  the  colors  in  a  large  roll  and  we  went  our  way  unto 
the  7th  Universe,  and  thou  went  into  the  Universe  and 
thou  saith  unto  the  master  therein :  "I  wouldst  leave 
this  here  until  the  time  cometh  when  I  shall  ask  of  thee 
that  thou  giveth  unto  me  of  this  knowledge  that  it  shall 
be  known  among  they  that  I  shall  dwell  among."  And 
he  laid  it  away  even  unto  the  roll  that  was  within  thy 
bosom,  and  thou  didst  wait  until  once  more  within  the 
physical  thou  didst  say  unto  me :  "What  givest  thou  me 
of  the  knowledge  of  Egypt  that  hath  been  not  according 
as  earth,  but  according  as  it  is  within  the  Great  Heav- 
ens?" And  when  thou  comest  unto  me  again  thou  saith 
unto  me :  "Marcus,  who  cometh  unto  thee  in  the  third 
hour?"  And  I  said  unto  thee:  "There  cometh  unto  me 
a  woman  and  she  was  veiled  and  she  giveth  unto  me  no 
name  but  she  said  to  tell  thee  that  when  thou  sought  in 
the  age  the  knowledge  of  the  Divine  Master,  that  she 
would  come  unto  thee  as  spirit  and  thou  wouldst  know 
her,  for  she  would  bear  for  thee  a  message  that  would 
have  within  it  many  of  the  colors  that  thou  didst 
place  within  the  7th  Universe,  and  she  left  for  thee  this 
circle."  And  within  the  circle  were  three  rings.  The 
first  ring  was  made  of  gold  and  the  second  was  of  silver 
and  the  third  was  of  iron;  and  that  which  held  it  to- 
gether, the  outer  ring,  was  of  ether.  And  thou  saith  unto 
me:  "How  can  I  carry  this  with  me?"  And  I  said  unto 
thee :  "If  thou  wilt  place  it  within  the  etheric  ring  thou 
wilt  always  have  it  when  thou  needest  it."  And  when 
thou  came  unto  the  physical  of  earth  thou  didst  choose 

111 


thine  etheric  body  and  around  and  about  it  thou  placed 
the  knowledge  that  was  within  the  etheric  ring  with  its 
three  circles,  gold,  silver  and  iron — Light,  Purity  and 
Truth.  And  thou  hast  often  said-  unto  thyself :  "Where 
lieth  the  great  city  of  Egypt  that  thou  tellest  me  of?" 
I  say  unto  thee  it  lieth  20  leagues  to  the  west  of  the 
Great  Heavens,  and  it  lieth  20  leagues  from  where  the 
orbit  of  the  great  Star  is  which  thou  callest  the  North 
Star;  and  it  is  20  leagues  beyond  the  light  of  the  High 
Heavens;  and  it  is  20  leagues  above  the  great  Nebula. 
And  thou  must  count  a  league  equal  to  one  millions  of 
miles  according  to  human  knowledge.  Then  thou  wilt 
know  where  the  great  City  of  Egypt  that  I  have  told 
thee  about  lieth,  and  it  holdeth  within  it  a  knowledge 
that  is  not  reflected,  neither  will  it  be  reflected  until  the 
great  day.  And  when  thou  thinkest  that  this  spirit  came 
together  and  this  master  cometh  together  and  they  giveth 
thee  many  things,  and  thou  hast  much  food  for  thought, 
but  they  bringeth  not  unto  thee  what  I  bringeth,  neither 
telleth  thee  whither  thou  should  go  and  from  whence 
thou  hast  come.  And  if  thou  thinkest  thou  wilt  know 
that  many  of  the  symbols  that  thou  hast  laid  away  within 
the  7th  Universe  hath  been  given  unto  many  masters 
and  they  bringeth  the  symbols  that  beareth  within  them 
a  great  truth. 

Then  I  wouldst  tell  thee  of  the  great  day  and  all  of 
the  city  were  gathered  together  for  there  was  to  come  to 
them  He  who  was  the  Son  that  was  to  be.  And  He  came 
unto  them  and  He  told  them  of  the  Father's  decree  and  I 
said  unto  Him:  "Yea  verily,  it  is  wise,"  and  He  went 
His  way.  And  there  came  unto  them  thv»  Son  of  the 
Father  and  He  saith  unto  them:  "I  wouldst  give  thee 
My  Father's  Law."  And  they  said:  "It  is  wise."  And 
He  said  unto  them:  "I  wouldst  give  thee  My  Father's 
Law,  that  is,  that  thou  shouldst  hold  thy  great  knowledge 

n2 


until  it  is  demanded  of  thee.'*  And  the  third  came  unto 
them  and  he  was  the  Son  of  the  Father ;  and  he  said  unto 
them :  "I  giveth  unto  thee  a  pure  knowledge  of  divinity 
and  thou  shalt  hold  it  and  protect  it  and  when  thou  seeth 
the  great  towers  of  the  Temple  that  shall  rise  above, 
gather  it  together  and  give  it  unto  they  who  are  the  High 
Priests  of  thy  Temple  and  say  unto  them  that  they  shall 
take  it  unto  the  great  land  that  lieth  beyond  even  the 
Great  Heavens,  and  there  they  shall  place  it  within  the 
Temple  that  shall  be  builded  that  shall  have  many  arches 
and  many  ways  for  all  to  enter  and  they  who  are  the 
spirits  of  they  who  shall  be  created  for  that  which  shall 
be  called  the  earth,  shall  stand  within  it  and  they  shall 
understand  the  Law  of  Divinity. 


QUESTIONS  AND  ANSWERS 

Q.     How  large  is  this  city? 

A.  The  city  measureth  one  cubit  to  the  north  and  two 
cubits  from  that  point  to  the  south,  and  to  the  east  it  is  four 
cubits  and  to  the  west  it  is  four  cubits.  That  encompasses  the 
portion  which  surrounded  the  Temple.  And  beyond  it  where 
the  hills  and  valleys  lie,  there  is  a  circle  of  five  cubits.  Meas- 
ureth thou  it? 

Q.    What  is  a  cubit? 
A.     Five  hundred  miles. 

Q.    Then  the  city  is  not  square  is  it? 
A.     No. 

Q.    Why  was  the  Mystic  Circle  created  at  that  time? 

A.  They  had  to  bring  in  much  of  the  higher  knowledge. 
Did  I  not  tell  thee  that  it  was  brought  from  the  heights  where 
the  penetration  must  be  given  to  those  who  must  follow  out 
and  receive  it,  and  he  who  receiveth  it  within  the  7th  Universe 
until  it  shall  be  called. 


113 


LESSON  XI 


MARCUS— January  3,  1919 

We  laid  aside  for  a  little  while  the  thought  that  we 
would  give  you  and  tonight  we  must  take  it  up,  for  we 
must  fill  full  for  you  the  great  consciousness  that  belongs 
to  the  past.  And  beginning  with  it,  as  I  shall,  it  may 
give  you  many  thoughts,  but  thru  the  memory  of  spirit 
do  we  produce  for  man  that  stronger  tie  that  eventually 
reveals  to  him,  not  only  what  has  been,  but  is  placed  in 
the  future.  Traversing  as  we  will  from  the  Egypt  that 
was  to  the  Egypt  that  earth  must  hold,  entering  into  the 
third  dynasty  after  the  establishment  of  the  spiritual 
reign  of  the  first  Pharaoh  of  which  thou  knowest.  We 
must  make  it  all  as  human  as  possible  that  you  may  carry 
the  line  of  thought  correctly. 

As  you  know,  form  held  a  predominate  and  great  pro- 
portion, but  considering  the  habitation  of  Egypt,  it  had 
been  reduced  sufficiently  that  spirit  controlled  in  a  higher 
and  greater  proportion  than  elsewhere  within  a  radius 
of  many  thousands  of  miles.  There  had  been  an  estab- 
lished connection  between  the  Chaldean  nation,  the  Assy- 
rians, the  Nubians  and  a  portion  of  an  extinct  race  that 
was  very  small  that  connected  lower  and  upper  Egypt. 
This  race  was  known  as  a  fraction  of  the  Aryans,  but 
only  once  in  a  while  were  they  visible  to  the  Egyptians 
in  either  portion  of  their  country.  They  hcl^  this  place 
in  order  that  etheric  bodies  should  be  utilized  from  time 

114 


to  time.  The  establishment  of  the  first  great  proportion- 
ing for  their  temples  had  to  be  accomplished.*  So  far  no 
knowledge  had  come  to  the  form  of  man  to  subject 
animals  and  place  them  under  control.  Here  it  is  where 
the  great  Udan  race  produced  the  first  great  thought  for 
this  power  to  be  used.  Several  of  their  magicians,  as 
Egypt  called  them,  were  brought  that  they  might  pro- 
duce especially  among  what  you  term  horses  a  subjuga- 
tion for  use.  It  is  needful  that  I  should  ti\ke  you  with 
me  very  closely  in  this  thought  for  here  it  is  that  the 
first  great  condition  of  what  afterwards  became  the  will 
of  man  is  brought  about.  Magicians,  in  the  days  of  the 
third  dynasty,  were  masters  that  understood  the  intellect 
of  the  animal  kingdom,  this  intellect  being  held  in  subjec- 
tion by  the  forces  of  unseen  light  which  was  the  power 
they  used  to  place  them  under  control.  Egypt  also  had 
no  particular  knowledge  at  this  time  of  light  forces  or 
even  sun  rays.  They  had  this  all  to  learn  in  order  that 
they  might  be  able  to  begin  placing  their  temples  under 
construction.  It  is  here  where  the  masters  of  the  7th 
Universe  brought  about  these  conditions.  I  have  told 
you  with  regard  to  the  great  pyramid  and  its  placing,  but 
tonight  I  want  to  tell  you  something  with  regard  to  the 
majestic  buildings  that  were  builded  of  wood  and  stone 
combined.  Here  it  is  where  the  plans  of  the  7th  Universe 
began  to  show  what  they  can  do  in  using  the  reflection 
of  what  is  in  the  Universe.  The  production  and  the  re- 
flection within  this  habitation,  which  was  the  third,  is  the 
one  great  condition  that  never  has  been  explained  either 
scientifically  or  otherwise.  But  in  the  transition  of  all 
atoms  within  the  earth  there  is  always  known  to  be  a 
certain  polarization  of  force  which  holds  within  it  that 


♦Their  bodies? 
Yes. 

US 


which  can  replenish  and  produce  a  recovering  or  a  re- 
planting whenever  it  is  needful.  This  will  explain  to  you 
the  great  thought  of  how  the  earth  can  be  replenished. 
Unto  us  was  given  the  right  to  build  four  great  temples. 
One  was  to  lie  to  the  south  of  the  great  pyramid,  and  it 
was  then  we  called  upon  the  Hettite  and  the  Chaldean 
races  to  bring  unto  us  the  different  woods  to  be  placed 
with  the  stones.  Here  is  your  first  great  symbol.  The 
woods  and  the  stones  were  to  be  laid  alternately  and 
bound  together  with  the  metal  of  the  earth,  beginning 
with  the  first  condition  of  iron  in  its  natural  conaition, 
following  with  copper,  combining  them  with  malachite, 
which  is  a  metal  that  after  being  congealed  by  the  mo- 
tion of  the  earth,  produced  what  is  known  as  quartz. 
Then  it  becomes  pulverized  and  the  sands  of  your  desert 
become,  as  it  were,  another  formation  of  it.  Iron  you 
know  represents  truth  and  upon  it  we  laid  the  first 
formation  of  wood,  which  was  teakwood,  perfectly  black. 
This  represented  the  combining  of  the  foundations  of  the 
earth  with  truth,  and  the  shadow  of  the  earth,  which 
was  to  hold  always  the  knowledge  of  Egypt  until  the  last 
transition.*  The  next  placing  was  the  clear  stone  which 
belonged  to  Egypt  alone,  that  was  connected  with  what 
is  known  as  the  amberwood  which  the  Hettites  brought 
from  the  far-off  isle  of  the  sea.  Science  has  never  seen 
it  as  it  only  grew  for  this  purpose  of  which  I  tell  you. 
It  was  bound  together  with  the  clear  stones  with  the 
copper,  which  is  the  symbol  of  the  holding  of  earth, 
water,  air  and  light  together.  Upon  this  we  erected  five 
great  stones  that  stood  at  a  height  of  300  feet,  from  the 
top  unto  the  base  was  covered  with  the  hieroglyphics 
representing  the  Laws  of  the  7th  Universe,  the  Laws  of 


♦What  is  the  Shadow  of  the  Earth? 
Mentality;  physical  mentality. 

116 


the  8th  Universe,  the  Laws  of  the  3rd  Universe,  the 
Laws  of  the  Unknown  Lands  and  the  Laws  of  the  Great 
Heavens.  These  were  covered  with  what  was  known 
at  that  time  as  the  filings  of  silver  which  were  produced 
by  grinding  within  stone  receptacles  and  they  adhered 
to  the  stone  by  the  power  which  man  afterward  hath 
given  the  name  of  gravitation.  These  five  great  pillars 
of  stone  represented,  without  the  symbols,  the  knowledge 
and  the  consciousness  of  the  five  great  Gods  that  Egypt 
afterwards  worshipped  as  people.  The  first  is  known  to 
you  as  the  Most  High  God ;  the  second  is  known  to  you 
as  the  God  of  the  Universe ;  the  third  is  known  to  you  as 
the  Lord  God  Almighty;  the  fourth  is  known  to  you  as 
the  God  of  the  Hosts ;  and  the  fifth  is  the  Sun  God  or  the 
God  of  Light  and  Power  and  Movement.  These  were 
placed  by,  not  only  the  Hettites  and  Chaldeans,  but 
Abyssinians,  Nubians  and  Egyptians.  The  Aryan  race 
exhausting  the  use  of  their  etheric  bodies,  placed  upon 
these  great  stones  the  silver  coating  over  the  symbols. 
That  finished  their  work  for  earth  at  that  time.  While 
we  were  there  drawing  by  reflection  the  impression  upon 
the  things  within  that  portion  of  the  earth,  it  was  needful 
that  we  should  hold  around  us  all  they  who  were  masters 
of  the  7th  Universe.  Among  them  is  one  of  which  you 
have  never  known.  He  was  a  master  who  came  from 
out  of  the  Universe  of  Light.  He  had  fulfilled  his  mis- 
sion in  the  Holy  Places  and  when  Egypt  needed  a  knowl- 
edge of  light,  he  came  with  us  and  within  this  dynasty 
he  taught,  and  I  produced,  by  movement,  and  you,  by 
thought,  the  knowledge  they  required. 

Let  us  at  least  understand  that  all  this  will  some  time 
hold  a  place  wherein  you  can  look  upon  it  and  understand 
clearly  my  explanation. 

Thousands  of  years  afterwards  one  of  the  Pharaohs 
who  had  a  slight  knowledge  handed  down  to  him,  strove 

117 


to  once  more  reproduce,  but  it  was  only  a  failure  in  many 
ways,  for  there  were  not  the  same  elements  of  either 
thought,  movement  or  light  to  hold  long  enough  to  place 
upon  the  material  the  impression  required. 

After  this  was  all  complete,  this  formed  a  perfect 
square  with  the  four  great  stones  and  the  one  in  the 
center.  Here  it  was  that  the  peoples  of  Egypt  gathered 
together  for  instruction,  worship  and  knowledge.  The 
first  Pharaoh,  with  a  spiritualized  thought,  had  left  suf- 
ficient for  them  to  arrange  a  form  of  worship,  and  it  was 
like  unto  this.  They  came  in  what  was  known  as  num- 
bers up  to  1200,  entering  thru  the  south  entrance  of  this 
temple  and  forming  12  rings  around  the  center  pillar. 
Here  they  repeated  in  unison  this  form  of  prayer,  as  you 
call  it  today :  "Give  unto  us  who  call  upon  you,  a  knowl- 
edge of  thy  light  that  we  may  reproduce  upon  the  earth 
a  reflection  of  what  we  have  known."  Upon  the  top  of 
this  wonderful  towering  stone  would  flash  a  light  and 
they  knew  then  that  they  had  come  close  enough  to 
understand  and  that  they  were  understood.  They  would 
then  pass  out  of  the  north  entrance  of  the  temple.  On  the 
east  side  of  the  temple  was  a  place  reserved  for  the  reign- 
ing Pharaoh.  Here  is  where  we  must  give  you  a  knowl- 
edge of  what  produced  this  Pharaoh  as  a  Ruler.  When 
the  great  division  into  spirit  was  arranged  that  the  earth 
should  have  nations,  Egypt  was  the  first  nation  to  divide 
according  to  its  knowledge  that  there  should  be  one  that 
would  lead  them  and  when  the  spiritualization  of  the 
form  for  their  nation  took  place,  they  used  this  knowl- 
edge and  gave  to  the  physical  being  of  one  a  right  to 
lead  and  control  them.  In  this  you  see  the  great  symbol 
of  leadership  of  spirit  that  hath  been  given  the  right  of 
absorption  of  higher  and  holier  thoughts.  The  west  side 
of  the  temple  was  reserved  for  all  who  were  known  to  be 
able  to  come  in  touch  with  the  God  of  Light  or  the  great 

118 


master  who  was  with  us,  and  it  was  here  that  we  were 
wont  to  gather  together.  There  were  seven  of  us  and 
among  the  number  was  the  Spirit  of  the  Earth  who  was 
afterwards  claimed  by  the  Jews  as  the  god  they  wor- 
shipped. Many  times  have  I  seen  you  hold  before  your 
own  thought  these  great  things  and  question  whether 
they  belonged  to  a  reality  or  whether  man  was  founded 
upon  a  nothingness  and  passed  into  nothingness.*  But 
out  of  the  great  thought  of  the  Infinite,  the  Spirit  came 
unto  you  and  proclaimed  the  knowledge  of  the  past, 
blending  together  the  scientific  thought  of  light,  move- 
ment, vibration  and  unison,  and  spiritualizing  it  with  the 
higher  forces,  making  it  a  fact  by  which  human  mind 
can  accomplish  a  realization  of  its  existence.  The  divi- 
sion of  male  and  female  was  equal  and  divided  according 
to  the  knowledge  of  the  spirit  of  light,  who  were — the 
Spirits  of  the  Earth — brought  about  what  would  be  after- 
ward known  to  man  as  the  equality  of  form  and  the 
purity  and  the  strength  of  spirit.  This  first  condition  in 
Egypt  was  the  highest  realization  that  human  form  has 
had  within  this  last  habitation.  You  will  find  among 
some  of  the  old  hieroglyphics  of  Egypt  this  form  and  the 
symbol  represents  this  division  of  male  and  female.  It 
is  a  cartouch  with  two  prongs  and  a  wavy  line  and  over 
it  is  a  hawk.  Some  have  interpreted  this  as  the  cartouch 
of  the  28th  dynasty,  but  that  is  not  correct.  It  was  the 
first  symbol  erected  in  the  3rd  dynasty  in  the  3rd  habita- 
tion and  represents  the  division  of  male  and  female  form. 

The  ruling  of  the  peoples  and  the  guidance  was  sepa- 
rated equally  between  the  two  and  the  female  of  this 
reign  was  known  as  the  Anquodes,  which  means  the  pure 
division,  and  there  is  where  the  great  symbol  of  the  two 


*Was  this  when  I  was  an  atheist? 
Yes. 

119 


prongs  forming  what  is  known  in  the  old  worship  of 
Egypt  as  the  "Tonghue,"  and  here  is  where  you  will  find 
the  origin  of  Upper  and  Lower  Egypt,  Upper  and  Lower 
Nile.  There  were  three  other  great  masters  from  the 
7th  Universe ;  one  must  produce  the  seal  for  Egypt  which 
is  a  round  disc  with  the  head  of  the  Pharaoh  and  the 
serpent  coiled  at  the  bottom.  The  first  one  was  made 
of  pure  copper  and  burnished  until  it  reflected  every- 
where. The  master  who  brought  this  forth  was  known 
in  the  7th  Universe  as  Amoskue.  He  afterwards,  in  order 
that  you  may  understand,  took  a  physical  body  and  was 
the  first  to  place  any  such  thing  as  a  rule  in  Russia. 
There  is  where  it  gets  the  name.  The  next  one,  or  the 
second,  was  known  as  Kulaiex;  it  was  he  who  brought 
the  first  form  unto  Egypt  as  to  how  they  could  plant  and 
reproduce  from  the  earth,  from  seed.  He  gathered  to- 
gether from  out  of  the  planet  Ryx  this  knowledge  and 
brought  it  to  earth  and  the  first  grain  that  was  sown  in 
Egypt  was  sown  at  the  north  tower  of  the  temple  and 
reproduced  grain  in  five  hours  according  to  your  count- 
ing. This  was  done  in  order  to  show  what  could  be 
done,  and  it  was  done  thru  the  reflection  of  light  and 
air,  as  I  have  told  you  that  the  movement  of  great  stones 
was  done  likewise.  Man  today  calls  it  the  holding  of 
electricity  in  the  metals.  Egypt  called  it  the  great  power 
of  light  and  air.  The  next  one  of  the  masters  from  the  7th 
Universe  was  known  as  Theodusbey,  he  afterward  be- 
came a  ruler  in  Persia  and  ruled  in  the  year  164  B.  C.  He 
brought  to  Egypt  the  first  great  knowledge  of  using  the 
spun  threads  of  three  of  the  creatures  that  the  earth  held. 
One  was  a  small  animal  that  abounded  in  Lower  Egypt 
and  had  a  way  of  working  like  unto  a  spider  except  that 
it  wove  a  small  cacoon  of  colors  gathering  from  out  of 
the  tree  points  the  pulpous  fibre  it  spun  what  it  did. 
These  colors  were  then  conveyed  and  utilized  with  the 

120 


spider's  thread  and  the  action  of  the  small  worm  which 
afterwards  was  reproduced  in  other  countries  as  the  silk- 
worm. This  master  gave  them  the  knowledge  of  weav- 
ing together  cloth  with  colors ;  he  also  brought  from  out 
of  the  planet  Saturn  the  impression  that  was  within  the 
earth  atoms  from  Saturn  the  coloring  of  minerals  and 
upon  stones.  All  this  work  was  not  accomplished  in  a 
few  days.  This  dynasty  existed  4560  days  and  seven  of 
us  held  an  etheric  body  for  that  length  of  time.  Here 
is  where  I  must  give  you  my  knowledge  of  the  use  of 
these  etheric  bodies.  They  were  pure  because  we  had 
brought  them  from  out  of  our  Universe,  but  in  coming 
in  contact  with  the  movement  of  the  earth  and  the  use 
of  material  action  in  which  we  had  to  come  in  contact, 
began  to  prove  to  us  that  they  were  exhaustible.  This 
will  explain  to  you  why  spirit  must  use  more  than  one 
etheric  body. 

While  the  Pharaoh  reigned  and  the  development  of 
the  people  grew  very  rapidly  under  his  guidance,  there 
was  no  dissension,  no  lack  of  what  the  earth  today  would 
term  as  miracles.  One  of  the  great  thoughts  I  wish  to 
convey  to  you  is  this:  there  was  no  deformity,  there 
was  no  disease;  there  was  nothing  to  impair  the  use  of 
these  forms  refined  for  the  use  of  spirit,  and  not  until  the 
movement  which  is  known  to  us  of  the  7th  Universe 
as  the  contrawise  movement  of  the  earth  did  any  of  these 
things  exist  for  man.  And  it  began  after  the  12th 
dynasty  in  this  great  age  of  which  I  am  giving  you  an 
account.  Here  it  was  that  you  and  I  learned  the  effect 
of  the  movement  of  atoms  thru  great  bodies  and  refined 
bodies.  It  was  here  that  we  watched  the  movement  of 
great  bodies  that  held  neither  soul  nor  spirit,  and  it  was 
here  we  learned  the  movement  of  refined  form  of  bodies 
that  held  a  soul — and  was  controlled  by  spirit.  In  the 
upper  portion  of  the  hemisphere  in  order  that  you  may 

121 


understand,  one  of  the  great  miracles  of  that  age  was 
this :  there  were  forms  of  what  you  would  call  men  that 
were  tremendous  in  height  and  breadth — this  was  pro- 
duced by  the  reflection  of  infinite  form  that  spirit  created 
as  it  came  within  the  tangibility  of  different  universes. 
This  symbol  is  often  reproduced  as  mountains  and  great 
elevations,  strive  to  reproduce  thru  reflection  the  forms 
in  many  of  the  Illumined  Worlds. 

1  have  given  you  a  very  hard  lesson,  one  that  will 
require  great  thought. 

Now  let  me  explain  how  the  refining  into  form  was 
produced.  All  of  the  great  divisions  of  Infinite  Spirit 
understanding  the  Law,  began  to  reduce  the  power  of 
reflection  within  earth  upon  atoms,  and  atoms  began  to 
seek  a  place  closer  within  the  center  of  the  earth.  This 
gave  the  outer  atoms  that  moved  into  form  a  fuller  real- 
ization of  the  movement  of  the  earth,  and  the  earth  began 
to  make  a  more  rapid  movement  within  its  orbit.  This 
congealed  still  more  the  closeness  of  the  atoms  and  this 
is  what  produced  a  more  refined  form  which  could  hold 
a  clear  reflection  of  infinite  form  of  spirit.  The  second 
great  thought  of  miracle  within  Egypt  was  when  form 
demanded  from  out  of  the  growth  of  the  earth  that 
which  should  sustain  it.  At  first  form  connected  with 
spirit  had  no  need  of  such  sustenance  or  substance  as  the 
air  gave  it  all  it  required ;  but  the  masters  who  were  with 
us,  understanding  that  the  time  would  come  when  they 
would  have  need  to  use  what  the  earth  held,  began  to 
place  within  the  action  of  thought,  the  knowledge  of 
sustenance.  There  was  also  a  manner  used  by  which  the 
atmosphere  was  congealed  bringing  forth  what  is  known 
as  the  manna  which  the  Israelites  gave  a  record  of.  It 
was  gathered  very  early  in  the  morning  and  was  clear 
and  jelly-like  in  form,  about  the  size  of  a  small  pebble ; 
this  was  partaken  of  once  a  day.    Then  came  the  utiliza- 

122 


tion  of  the  grains  and  the  fruits  in  order  that  there  should 
be  sufficient  liquid  from  the  fruits  utilized  with  the  grains 
and  produce  within  this  refined  form  the  substance  where- 
by the  body  would  be  supported  perfectly.  This  is  the 
first  miracle  that  was  known  to  them  where  bone  be- 
came an  absolute  produced  substance.  Then  came  the 
miracle  where  blood  was  to  be  produced  within  the  body. 
The  first  of  this,  as  you  know,  came  from  the  atmosphere  ; 
then  that  it  might  be  still  more  congealed,  they  were 
taught  the  use  of  partaking  of  bird  from  those  creatures 
that  were  within  the  air.  Later  on  within  the  4th,  5th, 
6th  and  7th  dynasties  they  were  taught  as  each  age  pro- 
duced the  demand,  the  use  of  animal  food.  This  is  your 
consciousness  of  Egypt  at  this  time  and  this  gives  you  an 
explanation  of  the  first  great  production  whereby  the 
present  form  of  man  demands  what  it  does  and  how  it 
can  exist.  Many  and  great  were  the  things  that  were 
accomplished  by  those  of  us  of  the  7th  Universe  and  the 
knowledge  whereby  the  transferring  over  water,  thru 
air  and  beneath  the  sea  was  left  for  the  9th,  11th  and  13th 
dynasties.  You  might  question  how  many  years  this 
was.  I  say  unto  you  that  it  covered  a  period  of  50,462 
years. 


QUESTIONS  AND  ANSWERS 

Q.  Why  was  it  condensed  into  that  period  of  time — is  there 
any  particular  reason  for  that? 

A.  Yes,  because  of  the  knowledge  of  the  5th  Universe  and 
the  five  great  pillars  of  stone. 

Q.     Is  there  any  other  symbol  in  connection  with  it? 
A.     Yes,  if  you  will  study  the  different  dynasties  you  can 
see  what  I  mean  by  the  fold  of  the  spirit. 

Q.  Why  is  it  that  the  masters  of  the  7th  Universe  have 
so  much  to  do  with  putting  these  things  together? 

A.  It  belongs  in  the  building.  These  are  the  foundations 
upon  which   man  begins   to   build   and  understand   the   Father. 

123 


Do  you  not  know  it  was  told  you  that  the  Great  Brotherhood 
would  bring  you  a  knowledge  of  the  unknown  things? 

Q.  I  would  like  to  know  who  gave  the  Jews  the  right  to 
choose  the  Spirit  of  the  Earth  and  then  man  to  hold  it  as  his 
guidance  instead  of  the  Father? 

A.  This  is  the  key  to  the  inharmony  of  atoms  that  pass 
thru  the  body  who  can  claim  only  the  right  to  worship  that 
which  holds  it  together,  and  the  Jews,  as  a  nation,  represent 
that  which  holds  the  atoms  together. 

Q.  What  is  this — what  name  can  you  give  us  so  we  may 
understand? 

A.  It  is  their  knowledge  of  the  Spirit  of  the  Earth  and 
that  is  what  they  have  given  you. 

Q.     The  Jews  are  the  last  ones  to  finish,  then  when  it  is 
finished,  does  that  dissolve  the  earth? 
A.    Yes. 

Q.  It  says  in  the  Bible,  that  they  shall  be  dim  of  vision — 
what  does  that  mean? 

A.  Can  you  see  save  with  the  Infinite  Spirit?  That  will 
give  you  a  clear  thought  that  only  thru  the  ether  of  the  soul 
can  the  spirit  give  vision  while  in  physical  being.  If  it  were 
given  a  perfect  vision,  then  physical  would  not  hold  either  the 
soul  or  the  spirit. 

Q.  What  do  the  Jews  hold,  the  something  that  stands  for 
the  purpose  for  which  we  have  a  soul? 

A.  They  hold  etheric  form,  just  the  same  as  the  atoms 
hold,  as  they  pass  from  out  of  the  physical  body. 

Q.     Who   creates   the   etheric   form? 

A.  When  you  have  a  knowledge  given  you  of  they  who 
are  masters  of  the  planets,  that  gave  unto  the  atoms  the  power 
of  holding  together  a  reflection  of  spirit  form,  that  man  hath 
no  way  by  which  to  separate  it  from  others,  then  you  will 
understand. 

Q.     Is  the  Jew  then  in  a  sense  planetary? 

A.  Yes,  until  their  work  is  finished,  then  will  begin  the 
great  work  of  creation  for  them.  They  have  never  created  as 
yet;  they  have  always  held  but  never  created. 

124 


Q.  You  know  Living  Thought  told  us  that  gold  is  what 
will  dissolve  all  else  and  then  gold  will  be  as  easily  dissolved — 
does  he  mean  by  that  that  the  principle  the  Jew  holds — because 
he  wants  to  get  gold? 

A.  No,  because  you  know  the  gold  they  get  is  alloyed,  it 
is  not  pure.  The  gold  that  is  pure  represents  the  Divine  Spirit. 
How  can  any  one  hold  it  together?  Can  you  not  read  the 
symbol  on  it  that  as  light  shines  everywhere  it  is  golden,  and 
it  holds  the  softness  of  thought  and  penetrates  and  yet  hath 
the  power  to  lead  out  as  light  leadeth? 

I  give  unto  you  much  food  for  thought  as  thou  knowest 
all  words  of  the  spirit  must  be  interpreted  one  at  a  time;  not 
together. 

Q.  Is  that  the  reason  why  we  are  not  given  all  knowledge 
at  once  because  the  brain  would  be  submerged? 

A.  Take  the  symbol  of  the  submerging  of  the  earth,  the 
material  portion  of  it,  and  you  can  recognize  why,  as  spirit,  we 
must  give  only  what  the  material  can  stand. 

Q.  According  to  the  interpretation,  it  is  claimed  that  the 
earth  hath  been  submerged  by  water  and  it  will  be  submerged 
by  fire — what  is  the  meaning  of  that  thought? 

A.  The  inflow  of  the  ether  which  is  spirit,  consuming  with 
its  intensity,  the  formation  of  material;  not  thru  sensation,  but 
thru  breath,  as  naturally  as  man  consumes  the  oxygen  within 
the  air  and  it  is  replenished  by  its  own  movement. 


125 


LESSON  XII 


MARCUS— February  6,  1919 

So  many,  many  things  force  themselves  into  the  great 
consciousness  that  I  find  myself  very  many  times  trying 
to  separate  them  that  you  might  have  all  that  I  can  bring. 

Our  Universe,  as  you  know,  has  to  hold  much  that 
supplies  the  foundations  for  everything,  and  if  I  should 
say  to  you  that  this  must  be  for  you  a  tho\ight  wherein 
the  consciousness  of  light  was  produced  that  thru  it 
might  follow  a  higher  knowledge,  law  must  be  placed 
for  a  fulfillment,  but  light  must  be  everywhere. 

Within  our  Universe  many  great  conditions  were 
established ;  long  before  the  earth  was,  and  I  am  striving 
to  impress  upon  you  the  thought  of  these  great  crea- 
tions. 

In  the  organizing,  or  forming,  of  any  great  plan  there 
has  to  be,  according  to  spirit,  not  a  beginning  as  you 
would  call  it,  but  a  fulfillment ;  and  in  this  lesson  I  would 
express  to  you  the  consciousness  of  the  first  great  age 
which  was  created  within  our  Universe. 

Let  me  place  it  for  you  in  this  way. — We  had  held 
all  great  conditions  and  it  also  held  all  ethers  that  were 
needful.  Now  we  proceed  to  utilize  this  under  three 
laws. 

The  first  law  is  the  purpose  of  creation,  and  in  and 
thru  it  we  use  Infinite  Ether. 

The  second  law  is  the  division  into  fractions  where 
movement  takes  up  its  power  and  the  law  is  this:     No 

126 


movement  of  spirit  has  within  it  aught  save  a  fractioniz- 
ing  for  the  purpose  of  the  intensifying  of  Infinite  Ether. 

The  third  is  where  ether  takes  up  and  is  held  for  the 
purpose  of  creating  of  units.  These  units  must  have 
for  a  foundation  the  substance  known  as  fluidic  light. 

Fluidic  light  is  not  as  you  in  the  physical  think  of 
fluid;  fluidic  light  as  spirit  views  it,  is  an  ever-moving 
vitalized  ether,  more  solid  than  the  aura  and  more  solid 
than  spiritual  ether.  This  is  what  forms  the  first  sub- 
stance for  the  foundation  of  etheric  bodies. 

Now  in  order  that  you  may  go  forth  with  this  thought 
into  Egypt,  I  take  you  with  me  and  we  follow  the  line  of 
thought  up  to  the  last  condition  where  Egypt  ruled.  It 
was  two  thousand  years  before  its  finality,  and  the  King 
who  ruled  as  a  spirit  came  from  the  7th.  He  was  vitally 
strong  and  etherically  spiritual.  This  vitality  of  strength 
was  composed  of  the  knowledge  and  the  consciousness  of 
the  bringing  together  and  placing  within  the  earth  that 
which  belonged  to  Egypt  and  which  could  not  be  under- 
stood by  man.  His  etheric  consciousness,  strong  as  it 
was,  he  only  used  with  the  force  of  spirit.  They  of  the 
7th  always  used  this  because  they  hold  the  knowledge 
of  the  creation  of  the  Electic  Circle. 

Egypt  had  existed  so  long,  and  the  power  and  the 
knowledge  had  grown  so  great,  and  yet  it  was  needful 
that  it  should  be  placed  where  nothing  could  destroy  in 
the  future. 

We  will  make  the  comparison  of  today.  As  the  de- 
struction for  future  intellect  is  complete,  if  the  earth  holds 
a  place  according  to  what  the  masses  consider  man's  in- 
heritance, so  Egypt  with  this  King  began  the  great  work, 
and  you  and  I  were  sent  with  Apolinus,  the  great  master 
of  mentality.  He  it  was  who  guided  and  directed  the 
gathering  together  of  this    great  knowledge.     Here   is 

127 


where  the  great  Mystic  Circle  of  the  Pyramid  holds  the 
mystery  for  the  earth. 

There  were  twelve  tablets  of  bronze;  twelve  tablets 
of  copper  and  twelve  tablets  of  gold.  They  were  banded 
together  with  iron,  and  beneath  the  Circle  within  the 
Pyramid  they  were  placed.  Upon  the  tablets  of  copper 
was  placed  the  mentality  of  the  first  knowledge  of  Egypt 
from  the  time  of  its  creation,  as  spirit,  until  that  age  that 
was  in  existence  when  this  was  done.  The  tablets  of 
bronze  held  the  interpretation  of  every  symbol  engraved 
upon  stone  all  over  the  whole  country  of  Egypt.  The 
third  tablets  held  the  knowledge  of  the  King  and  the 
connecting  link  between  the  Mystic  Circle  and  the  Electic 
Circle. 

Here  I  will  speak  of  a  few  things  that  you  may  know 
really  what  that  means.  The  Electic  Circle  is  the  great 
vivifying  circle  that  holds,  as  it  does,  the  knowledge  of 
spirit  and  the  signals  for  the  movement  of  every  great 
mass,  whether  it  be  of  earth  or  whether  it  be  of  other 
conditions.  The  Electic  Circle  moves  in  perfect  unison 
with  the  great  condition  of  the  Central  Force  wherein 
abideth  the  Father.  This  Electic  Circle  holds  more 
power  and  force  than  would  convey  or  carry  forth  all 
universes  and  as  many  earths  as  you  can  calculate  with 
your  mentality.  The  size  of  this  Electic  Circle  is  three 
times  the  width  of  the  earth  and  five  times  its  circumfer- 
ence. Within  the  center  of  it  is  what  is  known  as  the 
great  motive  power  of  all  cycles.  They  of  the  7th  are 
perfectly  aware  of  all  this,  and  upon  this  tablet  was  ar- 
ranged the  laws  that  controlled  the  relationship  between 
the  Electic  Circle  and  the  Mystic  Circle  of  the  Pyramid. 

The  Mystic  Circle  of  the  Pyramid  had  the  power  of 
reflection  as  the  knowledge  would  pass  thru  the  Electic 
Circle  and  be  transferred  to  earth. 

From  that  time  unto  the  present  there  has  never  been 

128 


a  Mystic  Circle  strong  enough  to  catch  the  reflection  from 
the  Electic  Circle.  All  powers  of  transition  conveyed 
thru  this  King  were  left  upon  these  tablets.  The  symbols 
that  hold  this  knowledge  will  never  be  read  unless  one 
from  the  7th  reaches  a  height  strong  enough  to  absorb, 
thru  the  transition  of  the  earth,  into  spirit  mentality; 
for  as  far  as  the  symbols  upon  the  plate  are  concerned, 
they  are  invisible  only  to  one  who  can  reach  out  in  this 
way. 

We  were  within  the  palace  and  the  King  had  been 
with  us  many  hours.  He  expressed  the  thought  that  he 
was  thru  his  work  and  ready  to  take  upon  himself  a 
spiritual  body,  but  according  to  the  law,  he  must  pass 
thru  the  great  spheres  of  earth.  While  we  yet  spake 
together,  there  came  one  unto  us  who  said  unto  us :  "I 
Cometh  unto  you  as  an  archangel  of  the  heights  and  I 
bring  unto  thee,  O  King  of  Egypt,  a  message"  and  I 
readeth  it  unto  you  like  unto  this:  "We  held  for  him, 
for  he  was  the  only  one  that  had  a  physical  body,  as  close 
a  protection  that  he  might  be  able  to  receive  this  mes- 
sage without  a  separation  from  his  body."  The  archangel 
raised  above  him  a  light  very  powerful  and  very  strong 
and  in  its  penetration  we  could  see  far  into  the  heights. 
There  we  saw  gathered  together  many  who  were  higher 
as  masters  than  we  had  ever  come  in  touch  with.  They 
were  under  perfect  control  and  waited  to  see  whether  the 
master  of  the  7th  would  accept  what  had  to  be  done,  or 
refuse. 

In  placing  this  for  you  in  this  way,  you  must  look 
closely  into  the  height  of  thine  own  consciousness,  for 
if  not  it  will  be  as  a  breath  that  wipes  it  out,  leaving  you 
to  once  more  seek  out  the  meaning  of  this  condition. 

Then  was  the  question  put  to  him :  "Art  thou  strong 
enough,  as  spirit,  to  test  the  power  of  the  Almighty?" 
For  a  moment  he  sat  in  deep  thought,  then  he  lifted  his 

129 


right  hand  and  he  said :    "Unto  the  Almighty  I  will  give 
my  oath." 

Again  we  looked  and  the  light  seemed  to  grow 
stronger  as  if  the  height  had  again  received  a  fuller  and 
a  more  complete  question ;  and  once  more  the  archangel 
spake  unto  him :  "Art  thou  ready  to  go  the  way  of  all 
masters?  For  thou  knowest  there  is  a  greater  service 
than  thou  hast  been  asked  to  give  ?"  A  look  passed  over 
his  face  and  we  watched  him  closely  to  see  what  his 
answer  would  be.  And,  turning,  he  said:  "According 
to  the  law  of  the  mastership  of  the  7th,  I  choose  to 
serve."  Again  the  heights  moved  as  if  a  radiance  had 
spread  over  it  leaving  naught  save  a  place  of  light,  and 
the  archangel  said:  "If  thou  art  a  master  thou  canst 
enter  the  light  alone."  Then  thou  didst  say  unto  him: 
"Thou  art  a  King,  thou  art  a  master,  yet  feelest  thou  that 
thou  canst  enter  the  light  alone?"  And  he  took  and  he 
laid  his  hand  upon  thee  and  he  said :  "When  thou  hast 
entered  the  spheres,  go  thou  to  where  the  rhythm  of  light 
within  the  7th  showeth  plain'  unto  thee  and  then  thou 
shalt  read  the  consciousness  that  was  given  to  me  as  I 
entered  the  light." 

You  and  I  left  him  alone  with  the  archangel,  then 
began  following  it  in  three  days,  the  work  of  placing 
between  the  double  stones  of  the  great  Pyramid  that 
which  held  the  records  which  no  man  will  ever  receive. 
We  called  from  among  the  King's  subjects  one  with  a 
physical  body  who  came  from  out  the  heights  of  the  High 
Heavens.  He  had  sought  a  body  strong  and  well  de- 
veloped and  he  came  bringing  with  him  all  the  physical 
strength  needed.  We  brought  from  out  of  our  Universe 
some  of  the  fluidic  substance  and  taking  the  rolls  we 
encased  them  in  it.  Then  this  workman  took  and  made 
three  incisions  in  the  rock,  tube-shaped,  about  28  inches 
long,  and  then  he  embedded  these  within  them.     Then 

130 


began  the  great  work  of  th^  adhesion  of  the  stones. 
Egypt  today  has  thousands  upon  thousands  of  stones 
that  have  not  been  affected  by  elements  in  all  ages  of  the 
earth's  existence.  This  stone  is  28  feet  beneath  the  sur- 
face of  the  earth,  16  feet  from  the  north,  350  feet  from  the 
south,  820  feet  from  the  west  and  460  feet  from  the  east. 
This  calculation  is  what  forms  the  nucleus  of  the  earth 
within  which  this  knowledge  is  placed,  and  it  is  the  only 
place  within  the  earth  where  any  spirit  from  any  uni- 
verse hath  ever  placed  this  fluidic  condition.  This  great 
pyramid  was  the  third  one  constructed  and  is  yet,  a  por- 
tion of  it,  in  existence.  After  it  was  all  complete,  which 
took  about  seven  days,  this  workman  disappeared.  He 
made  a  voyage  to  the  head  of  the  Nile,  there  he  met  the 
master  from  out  of  the  High  Heavens  and  he  went  his 
way  from  whence  he  came. 

The  King  of  Egypt  was  loath  to  let  us  go.  He  said 
that  we  should  give  unto  him  our  knowledge  of  our  Uni- 
verse and  he  still  did  not  know  whether  he  would  be  per- 
mitted to  pass  on  or  would  have  to  make  the  circuit  of 
the  planes. 

One  day  as  the  cool  of  the  morning  swept  thru  the 
great  palace  we  three  sat  together.  Many  were  the  things 
which  we  talked  about  and  his  knowledge  and  conscious- 
ness of  the  place  from  whence  he  came  were  wondrous 
to  us.  This  was  one  of  the  things  he  said :  'T  know  that 
thou  shalt  come  unto  me  and  within  the  7th  I  will  have 
many  things  to  show  thee."  And  while  we  yet  spake 
together  there  came  a  flash  of  light  and  into  his  lap  was 
dropped  a  tiny  roll  wrapped  around  with  etheric  thought. 
He  opened  it  and  within  it  were  three  ciphers.  He  read 
it  and  he  said  unto  you :  "I  wouldst  that  thou  shouldst 
call  Imhotep.  Imhotep  had  gone  unto  the  High  Heav- 
ens and  would  not  return  for  three  days ;  and  thou  said 
unto  him:     "We  must  wait.     What  wouldst  thou  have 

131 


him  do?"  "I  wouldst  that  he  shouldst  translate  for  me 
these  three  ciphers,  for  human  conditions  have  shut 
away  from  me  the  power  of  doing  it."  His  voice  was  sad 
as  if  in  some  way  he  felt  the  influence  of  what  he  was 
passing  thru.  That  night  as  the  great  palace  was  aglow 
with  light  and  beauty  and  the  wealth  of  Egypt  had  come 
together,  an  old  priest  came  and  called  thee  and  he  said 
unto  thee :  "I  wouldst  thou  wouldst  go  with  me.  Some- 
one needeth  thee."  And  thou  and  I  went  together.  We 
went  to  the  outer  wall  of  the  city  and  standing  close 
against  it  was  the  figure  of  a  young  man.  He  was 
dressed  in  the  skins  of  they  of  the  desert,  and  he  carried 
naught  save  a  water  bottle  with  the  skins  that  were 
empty.  "What  wouldst  thou  of  me?"  thou  didst  say. 
And  he  said  unto  thee:  "Master,  they  of  the  7th  Uni- 
verse hath  sent  me  that  thou  shalt  know  that  the  Law  of 
Ishmael  is  finished." 

Once  more  thou  didst  look  and  didst  see  the  shadow 
of  the  earth,  thou  didst  see  the  vast  desert  where  they  of 
Ishmael  wandered  to  and  fro.  I  touched  thee  on  thy 
hand  and  said:  "Master,  the  young  man  waiteth  that 
thou  shalt  answer  him."  Then  thou  took  from  out  thy 
girdle  a  written  word  which  in  Ishmael  means  *Unto  thee 
shall  be  given  peace  thru  the  knowledge  of  Divinity.' 
Turning,  the  old  man  came  close  to  thee  and  taking  thy 
robe,  he  pressed  it  within  his  hands  and  then  thou  didst 
know  who  he  was.*     And  he  said  unto  thee:     "Master, 


♦Who  was  he,  Marcus? 

I  have  told  you  in  there.  Was  that  not  the  old  age  of  the 
earth?  Do  you  not  know  I  told  you  about  the  different  ages  of 
the  earth  and  that  was  one  of  them  and  he  came  as  the  old 
man  and  when  he  had  pressed  the  garments,  when  you  had 
known  and  become  conscious  of  that  age,  then  you  knew  who 
he  was. 

132 


knowest  thou  not  that  the  work  of  Ishmael  is- not  com-, 
plete?"  And  when  thou  didst  look  upon  him  thou  didst 
know  that  he  had  the  spirit  of  he  who  had  first  given  unto 
the  desert  they  who  were  known  as  Ishmael.  The  young 
man  waited  and  the  old  man  took  his  water  jar  and  filled 
it  full  of  fresh  water.  Then  thou  saith  unto  him :  "Three 
days  from  now  thou  shalt  meet  he  who  ruleth  over  thy 
people.  Let  him  write  within  the  Book  of  thy  Laws  this 
which  I  have  given  thee.  The  old  man  turned  and 
blessed  him  and  went  with  him,  for  it  was  the  beginning 
and  the  end  of  the  great  race.  And  thou  and  I  watched 
them  as  they  went  their  way  into  the  far-off  shadows  of 
the  desert  land. 

Morning  of  the  third  day  came  and  Imhotep  stood 
beside  us  and  thou  didst  say  unto  him :  "We  will  go  unto 
the  King,  he  seeketh  that  thou  shouldst  write  for  him  the 
ciphers  that  hath  come  from  the  land  of  the  7th."  And 
Imhotep  and  you  and  I  went,  and  the  King  greeted  us 
and  he  saith:  "I  am  ready,"  and  Imhotep  writeth  down 
the  meaning  of  the  ciphers.  And  the  first  cipher  saith 
unto  the  King:  "Thou  hast  the  right  to  ask  thy  freedom, 
but  thou  must  go  unto  he  who  shall  be  known  as  the 
Keeper  of  the  Souls  of  Men  and  he  will  give  thee  that 
which  is  thine."  The  second  cipher  was  like  unto  this: 
"Thou  shalt  seek  out  within  the  realms  of  that  which 
lieth  east  of  the  spheres  and  shall  know  that  thou  art 
to  be  given  more  than  all  spirit  who  seeketh  a  human 
body."  And  the  third  cipher  saith:  "If  thou  in  thy 
worthiness  go  as  thou  art  bade  to  do,  thou  wilt  find 
nothing  but  what  shall  give  thee  what  thou  needeth." 
Then  thou  saith  unto  him :  "When  thou  goest  take  with 
thee  three  stones  that  I  giveth  unto  thee,  for  within  the 
spheres  must  be  laid  the  foundation  for  the  Temple  of 
Egypt.  Lay  thou  one  to  the  east,  one  to  the  west  and 
one  to  the  south.     But  there  is  one  who  shall  come  who 

133 


must  lay  the  one  that  is  to  the  north,*  and  he  said  unto 
thee:  "If  thou  goest  from  Egypt  I  wouldst  that  thou 
shouldst  leave  all  for  me  as  thou  thinkest."  Then  came 
there  one  unto  Imhotep,  she  was  the  daughter  of  the 
Pharaoh  who  had  been  and  her  hair  was  white  like  unto 
the  snow  and  she  said  to  Imhotep :  "Whither  hast  thou 
been?  Knowest  thou  not  that  the  days  of  the  Pharaoh 
are  past  and  the  coming  of  that  which  is  to  be  when 
Egypt  is  not,  I  know.'*  And  she  showed  thee  many 
things  that  had  been  written  by  her  father.  And  Imho- 
tep said:  "I  wouldst  that  thou  shouldst  not  mourn  for 
thy  people  for  they  go  unto  the  place  prepared  for  them." 
And  she  said  unto  him :  "I  wouldst  mourn  not,  but  I 
seek  that  I  goeth  unto  the  Egypt  that  was  before  earth 
claimed  it  as  her  own."  And  Imhotep  comforted  her  and 
she  went  her  way  and  when  the  King  was  ready  and  the 
fall  of  Egypt  had  begun,  we  three  watched  it  from  the 
height  of  the  Egypt  of  the  spirit.  We  saw  the  crumbHng 
of  the  great  walls  of  the  Temple ;  we  saw  they  who 
sought  and  destroyed  the  greatness  thereof  and  we  saw 
that  which  passed  over  it  and  the  nation  became  small 
and  reduced.  And  then  we  turned  our  faces  toward  the 
height  for  he  who  had  been  made  King  over  Egypt  had 
served  within  the  spheres  and  as  spirit  was  free  to  go  his 
way.  And  he  said  unto  us :  "Within  the  height  abideth 
the  great  knowledge  of  the  Father  and  if  thou  wouldst 
go  with  me  thou  shalt  see  and  know  and  understand." 
This  was  in  the  last  days  of  Egypt.  Thou  knowest  its 
consciousness  has  been  perfect  and  complete.  Thou  hast 
sought  it  out  and  looked  upon  it  with  the  vision  of  the 


♦Who  is  he,  Marcus? 

The  Lord  God  Almighty,  the  last,  the  one  to  the  north.  Do 
you  know  why?  Because  he  watches  the  incoming  of  all  spirit 
to  earth  that  unto  his  son  he  shall  give  the  numbering.  (He 
keeps  the  record). 

134 


human  and  thou  hast  looked  upon  it  with  the  vision  of 
the  spirit.  But  thou  shalt  look  upon  it  in  its  greatness 
and  in  its  splendor  for  out  of  that  which  hath  been  within 
it  they  will  re-create  and  create  and  create  until  it  shall 
become  more  perfect  in  the  sight  of  its  creator. 

This  lesson  holds  for  you  a  knowledge  of  one  of  the 
Unknown  Laws.  And  thou  must  study  and  seek  for 
thyself  a  knowledge  of  it  that  thou  mayst  know  that  not 
of  the  human  is  it,  but  of  the  spirit. 


QUESTIONS  AND  ANSWERS 

Q.  There  is  a  question  I  would  like  to  ask  with  regard  to 
the  Electic  Circle:  Is  not  the  Electic  Circle,  in  spirit,  doing  the 
acting,  performing,  and  work,  just  similar  to  the  field  magnets 
of  the  dynamo? 

A.  No,  because  it  is  created  out  of  light;  but  it  acts  in 
unison  with  the  great  dymatic  power.  It  makes,  not  an  attrac- 
tion thru  any  metallic  force,  but  thru  vital  force.  Nothing 
within  the  earth  has  that  except  the  human  body,  and  the  human 
body  has  a  small  portion;  that  is  all. 

Q.     Where  is  that  portion  within  the  human  body? 

A.  It  is  in  the  center  of  the  soul-body;  it  lies  at  the  entrance 
of  the  heart. 

If  man  could  attract  this  in  sufficient  amount,  he  would 
make  perpetual  motion;  but  even  the  body  cannot  attract^ 
enough  to  keep  that.  There  is  not  enough  within  the  particles 
that  man  takes  into  his  body  to  hold  a  complete  balance  for 
these  great  forces. 

There  are  many  things  in  this  one  thought  that  can  be 
followed  out  and  held  for  future  explanations,  such  as  answering: 

What  power  holds  the  earth  suspended  in  space? 

What  power  creates  great  cycles? 

What  unit  holds  the  greatest  knowledge? 

You  have  never  quite  understood  the  combination  of  forces 
to  a  degree  and  height  of  how  much  they  can  do.  As  yet  you 
are  making  calculations.     One  thing  you  have  done  and  that  is, 

135 


yea  have   developed  the  force  and  power  within   yourself  to 
hold  distinctly  a  thought  that  can  penetrate  into  immensity. 

Q.  Marcus,  in  the  mastership  of  earth,  what  relationship 
does  that  hold  as  we  strive  to  compare  it  with  the  mastership 
of  a  universe  or  of  any  condition  greater  than  earth? 

A.  The  mastership  of  earth  compares  in  this  way:  that  you 
utilize  the  forces  of  atoms,  the  forces  of  combined  oxygen,  and 
you  follow  out  wherever  there  is  this  condition  within  a  uni- 
verse and  it  gives  you  the  penetration  into  their  creations.  The 
mastership  of  earth  is  not  for  substance  altogether,  but  in  what 
surrounds  substance  and  everything  within  that  condition. 

Q.  As  I  understand  it,  the  earth  and  its  environments  with- 
in the  orbit  hold  this  that  we  gain  a  mastership  of;  beyond  that 
lies  immensity  with  its  corresponding  conditions;  then  those 
universes  that  hold  great  conditions  lie  beyond  that? 

A.  Yes,  and  among  and  within  and  around  are  their  orbits, 
their  cycles,  their  belts  of  light,  their  nebulae,  their  creative 
center  and  on  and  on  and  on. 

Q.     How  many  nations  went  thru  the  same  condition? 
A.     Seven. 

Q.    The  number  of  races  for  the  earth  is  seven? 

A.     Yes. 

There  is  something  I  have  been  wanting  to  tell  you  for 
quite  a  while  that  you  may  know  that  within  the  present  con- 
dition that  the  changing  of  mentality  will  seem  to  many  as  if 
man  had  lost  his  mentality. 

Q.  These  people  who  are  creating  all  the  disturbance  at 
the  present  time  as  we  look  upon  it  as  more  or  less  unbalanced, 
18   that   an   improved   condition   with   them? 

A.     No,  it  is  the  changing  of  mentality. 

Q.  Later  on  they  will  straighten  out  and  then  are  im- 
proved? 

A.     Yes. 

Q.     What  is  to  be  the  result  of  this  later  condition? 

A.  It  will  be  just  like  the  effervesence  of  the  liquor  within 
the  jar,  it  will  throw  off  and  throw  off  until  finally  the  pure 
element  will  remain  and  that  will  have  the  effect  of  balancing. 

136 


The  time  will  come,  though,  when  a  man  will  be  ashamed  to  be 
rich.  Financially?  You  could  not  say  riches  from  any  other 
because  it  is  your  heritage  thru  the  father. 

Q.  When  this  combination  is  absorbed,  what  takes  its 
place  ? 

A.  Equality.  In  other  words,  man  will  do  to  make  more 
perfect  and  he  will  equalize  everything. 

Q.     What  will  take  its  place  for  exchange? 

A.  You  won't  need  to  have  exchange.  If  all  is  equal,  each 
one  has  a  right — there  will  be  no  exchange.  They  will  be  in 
sections  each  one  choosing  so  many  at  intervals  and  if  all  is 
equal  they  won't  have  to  make  many  decisions  because  each 
one  will  know  what  they  ought  to  do.  There  will  be  enough 
to  do  for  whatever  the  needs,  will  be  created  that  to  work  with 
and  that  to  make  things  out  of — according  to  the  needs.  And 
man  will  not  do  because  he  has  to,  but  because  he  wants  to. 


137 


LESSON  XIII 


MARCUS— March  6,  1919 

We  must  take  up  the  consciousness  of  what  all  things 
are  created  of  and  for.  I  have  taken  you  thru  great 
heights,  both  of  spirit  and  of  human ;  of  creations  and 
placings ;  of  the  consciousness  and  the  origins — thru  all 
ages  of  the  earth  and  before  the  earth  was.  And  yet  I 
have  never  given  you  that  which  shall  form  the  con- 
sciousness of  which  things  are  created,  and  why.  The 
unit  of  man's  thought  has  never  risen  to  the  height 
wherein  even  the  spirituality  of  man  forms  a  connection ; 
and  the  unity  of  spirit  as  it  stops  long  enough  to  touch 
with  its  fingers  the  outer  condition  of  man's  mentality 
certainly  has  to  have  both  reasoning,  law  and  power  to 
form  a  link. 

You  have,  in  physical  life,  placed  together  two  ex- 
tremes, and  yet  you  have  not  known  why.  First,  you 
took  reason  and  submitted  your  mentality  to  it  and  you 
disposed  as  you  thought  of  every  fraction  of  conscious- 
ness that  could  enter  physical  mentality.  I  have  taken 
you  to  the  height  where  spiritual  mentality  held  in  per- 
fect obedience  the  physical  mentality  and  have  placed 
consciousness  and  higher  thought,  higher  reason  and 
higher  proofs  that  you  might  unify  and  place  them  for 
yourself. 

The  creation  of  "things'*  embraces  a  large  portion  of 
what  man  at  the  present  is  striving  to  utilize  and  place 

138 


under  the  subjection  and  demand  thru  scientific  laws  a 
proof  of  what  has  been  the  thought  for  thousands  of 
years  within  the  earth. 

The  first  great  composition  of  the  consciousness  of 
created  things  began  before  spirit  was  created  for  earth, 
and  the  creation  of  things  embraced  what  I  can  place 
within  mental  consciousness.  I  say  this  word  "things" 
that  it  may  embrace  and  cover  everything  that  you  can 
think  or  feel  may  belong  and  be  worthy  of  creation. 

The  first  explanation  given  unto  me  was  this:  That 
the  first  element  of  thought  in  the  creation  of  a  condition, 
a  world,  a  place,  a  universe,  a  sphere,  a  planet,  a  star,  a 
heaven  or  any  zone  or  link,  was  this — **I,  thru  the  breath 
of  holiness,  create  that  which  shall  always  hold  purity 
that  it  may  develop  higher  and  higher. 

The  second  consciousness  was  in  the  creation  of  that 
which  should  move  and  hold  within  it,  immensity,  space, 
time,  movement  and  action;  and  this  was  the  thought 
that  produced  its  creation, — "Unlimitation  giveth  a  pro- 
gression that  holds  re-creation." 

The  third  was  this:  That  in  the  creation  of  that 
which  was  within  universes,  spheres,  worlds  and  heavens 
should  contain  a  diversity  of  conditions  that  would  pro- 
duce a  multiplicity  for  whatever  they  were  needed.  With- 
in this  was  this  thought  that  actuated  their  creation — 
"The  unifying  for  whatever  purpose  that  I,  Infinite,  give, 
must  hold  that  which  will  produce  harmony  and  life  for 
that  which  cometh  unto  it."  This  is  what  is  called  the 
Reasoning  Consciousness  of  the  Thought  of  the  Creation 
of  these  Things. 

We  now  take  up  the  consciousness  purely  of  spirit, 
which  reaches  beyond  what  is  known  as  reason  developed 
thru  the  medium  of  man's  mentality.  With  spirit  we 
need  hold  no  reasoning  powers,  for  thru  the  conscious- 
ness of  the  thought  of  the  origin,  we  only  hold  ourselves 

139 


subservient  to  the  beauty  and  the  love  of  that  which 
created  the  thought  first  and  then  created  that  which 
should  follow  it.  In  this  I  have  given  you  the  highest 
degree  of  the  consciousness  of  the  creation  of  things,  as 
far  as  the  earth  is  concerned,  and  the  thought  of  that 
which  belongs  to  spirit  as  it  is  created  for  earth. 

Now  I  wish  to  go  a  little  farther  for  you  in  this  con- 
sciousness. 

Holiness,  in  its  highest  sense,  thru  the  thought  of 
creation,  fills  this  place;  without  holiness  there  is  no 
purity;  and  thru  purity  must  I  fill  full  the  life  of  that 
which  I  created  for  spirit.  This  is  the  Consciousness  of 
the  Inward  Thought  of  Spirit  as  it  lifts  itself  into  a  real- 
ization of  what  it  must  create  when  it  reaches  this  con- 
dition. Once  more.  In  the  consciousness  of  higher  in- 
telligences of  spirit,  of  which  there  are  known  to  us  at 
the  present,  three,  the  first  is  this :  Its  creation,  passing 
thru  the  consciousness  of  its  spirit,  holds  the  purity  and 
strength  within  this  creation  and  only  has  to  have  Infinite 
Breath  to  make  it  a  higher  creation  and  a  more  subtile 
connecting  link  between  it  and  the  consciousness  of  its 
spirit.  I  can  only  give  you  these  with  this  thought — 
that  in  the  creation  of  all  these  things  and  conditions,  the 
demand  of  spirit  holds  always  a  wonderful  connection. 
If  you  make  your  comparisons  from  the  highest  thought 
you  have,  you  will  find  that  whenever  an  age,  an  epoch 
or  a  condition  within  any  created  thing,  matters  not  what 
it  is,  you  will  find  that  that  which  is  the  residue  within 
it,  is  always  pure  and  holy. 

I  now  want  to  take  you  into  the  Consciousness  of 
Thought. 

Man  has  never  been  able  to  measure  spiritual  thought. 
The  Finite  of  mind  holds  it  too  closely ;  while  the  Infinite 
of  spirit  giveth  it  a  wide  freedom.  I,  Marcus,  as  I  lay 
together  the  stones  in  the  wall  upon  which  the  founda- 

140 


tion  of  consciousness  is  built,  find  that  the  mathematical 
calculation  is  so  great  that  every  thought  I  have  ever 
given  you  is  like  unto  these  stones  and  they  fit  together 
perfectly.*  Also,  in  the  connection  between  Finite 
Thought  and  Spiritual  Thought,  there  is  this — that  spirit 
can  lift  finite  thought  into  the  height  of  spiritual  thought, 
but  in  order  that  finite  thought  shall  reach  infinite 
thought,  it  must  be  transposed  thru  what  is  known  as  the 
consciousness  of  spirit  in  order  that  it  may  reach  Infinite 
Thought. 

The  first  great  creation  of  thought  that  I  can  find  for 
you  began  with  the  first  conscious  condition  when  you 
entered  the  7th  Universe.  And  the  first  conscious 
thought  that  you  gave  to  Infinite  was,  the  creation  of  a 
consciousness  within  your  universe.  This  held  the 
knowledge  that  your  spirit  had  breathed  within  itself 
when  it  became  conscious  of  its  separateness  from  the 
Father. 

You  will  have  to  take  each  one  of  these  conditions 
and  fractionize  for  yourself,  in  order  to  become  wholly 
attuned  to  the  thought. 

Now  let  me  give  you  an  example :  Imhotep  holds  that 
which  memorizes  the  knowledge  of  ages.  You  hold  that 
which  inscribes  upon  the  foundations  the  impression  of 
consciousness.  I,  lifting  as  I  do,  the  elements  of  creation, 
place  them  side  by  side  with  the  consciousness  of  thought. 
But  the  Infinite  must  give  unto  each  of  these  creations 
life.  Without  it,  it  would  be  as  if  you  had  placed  the 
earth  without  color,  form,  movement,  or  thought.  Unity 
in  all  these  conditions  is  what  forms  the  great  chain  that 
binds  together  each  creation  into  one  perfect  relationship. 

In  the  explanation  of  the  creations  their  multiplicity 


♦Isn't  stone  in  this  instance  the  symbol  of  thought? 
Yes. 

141 


is  great ;  without  the  silent  language  of  spirit  it  would  be 
impossible  to  explain  fully;  the  only  word  that  I  could 
use  would  be  that  which  means:  ''without  a  limitation, 
either  above,  beyond,  beneath  or  around." 

In  drawing  close  to  you  with  these  thoughts,  I  find 
that  many  times  you  stand,  as  it  were,  waiting  that  you 
may  hold  finite  (with)  that  which  belongs  only  with 
Infinite,  yet  have  I  striven  to  place  that  between  which 
shall  aid  you  in  what  you  seek.  Can  you  put  together 
steel  and  steel  that  you  should  make  that  which  you  can 
bend  according  to  your  plan?  Or  must  you  place  iron 
and  steel  that  one  shall  form  the  resistance  and  the  other 
the  acceptance  ?  Truth  holdeth  that  which  is  unchange- 
able, yet  there  is  an  element  that  is  impressionable  and 
which  holds  not  the  strength  of  truth — that  is  finite. 

I  have  waited  long  that  out  of  the  great  archives  I 
might  bring  these  thoughts,  pure  as  they  are,  that  they 
might  form  for  you  a  higher  consciousness  and  broaden, 
as  it  were,  your  perception  of  what  lies  before  you,  in  the 
great  work  of  the  future. 

Human  thought  separates  and  leaves  the  earth  and 
then  gives  nothing  to  be  created  afterwards ;  while  we  of 
the  spirit  know  that  the  life  of  earth  is  only  earthly  cessa- 
tion whose  time  is  scarcely  calculated  in  the  experience 
that  spirit  gains  thru  it. 

I  want  to  give  you  a  little  consciousness  together  in 
what  is  known  as  the  Land  of  the  Sun,  and  in  speaking 
of  this  I  may  place  for  you  a  relationship  with  many  who 
have  penetrated  far  enough  to  catch  a  glimpse  of  the 
thought  that  lies  within  this  condition.  The  reason  it  is 
called  "The  Land  of  the  Sun"  is,  because  it  was  created 
thru  the  movement  of  many  great  movements  and  actions 
and  multiplicities  of  light  which  afterwards  a  portion 
was  used  for  the  creation  of  one  of  your  physical  suns. 
It  is  here  that  you  can  become  conscious  that  the  earth 

142 


has  a  peculiar  physical  sun.  It  is  disc  within  a  disc,  and 
it  moves  alternately,  as  far  as  the  earth  is  concerned,  a 
part  of  the  time  throwing  light  thru  one  and  then  again 
thru  the  other.  These  discs  are  placed  together  and  are 
composed  of  what  is  known  as  quartruple  fluid  that  is 
created  when  light  is  reduced  in  a  way  which  can  be 
thru  great  spaces  utilized  for  the  earth.  It  is  too  power- 
ful in  its  original  creation  for  the  earth  to  use;  that  is 
why  for  the  one  physical  sun  it  was  separated  into  two 
discs  and  operated  in  this  manner.  This  Land  of  the 
Sun  holds  the  absolute  power  as  far  as  physical  matter, 
or  earth  fractions,  planetary  atoms  and  zonic  atoms  are 
concerned.  However,  there  are  other  lights  that  are  not 
created  or  held  within  this  condition.  Many  universes 
passing,  utilize  some  of  their  light,  like  you  would  stop 
and  attract  thru  currents  what  you  use  at  the  present  as 
electricity.  This  wonderful  stream  of  light,  if  I  should 
give  you  a  knowledge  of  it,  would  be  hotter  than  molten 
iron,  and  in  size  as  it  comes  from  the  center,  larger  than 
five  times  the  size  of  your  earth.  It  has  what  you  call 
tributaries  or  separating  places  where  it  is  molded  into 
great  forms  of  light.  Etheric  suns,  suns  of  great  masses 
that  supply  planetary  light,  comes  from  this  condition. 
All  fixed  stars  are  given  a  small  fraction  of  it.  And  it  is 
utilized  in  the  same  manner  by  them  as  you  utilize  water 
as  far  as  the  earth  is  concerned.  They  can  create,  accord- 
ing to  the  consciousness  we  have  had  of  them,  over  three 
million  physical  suns  if  it  was  needed,  in  the  fraction  of  a 
second. 

You  have  asked  me  if  it  is  possible  to  give  you  a 
scientific  consciousness  and  I  have  endeavored  to  do  so. 

Electricity,  elemental  force,  gravitation,  unifying  of 
particles,  separating  into  zonic  matter,  the  intelligence  of 
ether,  the  radiations  and  vibrations  of  light  and  air,  all 
are  fractionized  for  the  earth  within  this  great  condition 

143 


in  the  Land  of  the  Sun.  The  arteries  of  the  earth's  uni- 
verse hold  within  them  small  particles  of  these  great 
lights.  Gravitation  only  depends  in  a  slight  degree  upon 
the  movement  of  these  great  forces  that  supply  light. 
These  forces  have  their  origin  in  another  condition,  the 
same  as  you  would  prepare  a  man  for  a  certain  condition 
in  different  portions  of  the  earth.  Electricity  in  its  pure 
state  within  this  condition,  holds  what  would  be  known 
as  three  hundred  sixty-seven  (367)  degrees  to  every  frac- 
tion or  80th  of  a  second  what  is  used  for  three  thousand 
years  within  the  earth.  All  solaric  systems  depend,  how- 
ever, upon  a  higher  source  of  light  within  which  revolving 
are  spaces  into  which  are  placed  millions  of  illumined 
worlds  and  suns  whose  solaric  system  has  three  times  the 
number  of  planets  that  the  earth  has  and  they,  extending 
outward  from  their  centers,  attract  from  this  higher  light 
all  that  supplies  them  with  whatever  they  may  demand. 

There  is  one  thought  I  have  never  given  you  that 
belongs  to  the  work  of  spirit  that  so  far  man  has  not  been 
given  any  knowledge  of.  And  it  is  with  regard  to  the 
animal  condition  within  the  earth  and  the  result  of  their 
earth's  experience  and  the  placing  afterwards. 

In  the  great  plan  of  creation  when  the  thought  of  earth 
passed  into  expression,  that  which  should  occupy  the 
earth  was  a  matter  that  had  to  be  placed  properly  and 
there  were  those  who  held  a  knowledge  of  how  to  create 
certain  portions  and  conditions  and  things  for  the  earth. 
Among  them  were  those  who  knew  how  to  create  animal 
spirit  that  it  might  become  a  life  force  imbued  with  suffi- 
cient intelligence;  from  the  highest  to  the  lowest  degree 
of  its  creation  there  was  always  a  combined  condition  of 
finite  and  consciousness.  In  the  placing  afterwards,  each 
fraction  wherein  they  are  placed  holds  them  according  to 
the  degree  of  intelligence  they  have  absorbed  as  they 
pass  thru  earth's  experience,  but  there  is  no  degree  that 
does  not  increase  as  it  passes  on. 

144 


QUESTIONS  AND  ANSWERS 

Q.    Marcus,  is  there  anybody  inhabiting  these  conditions? 

A.  Certainly.  They  are  susceptible  to  the  influence  of 
Infinite  spirit.  Some  of  these  solaric  systems  hold  an  advanced 
state  of  planetary  systems  and  planetary  spirits.  Some  hold 
what  is  known  as  great  conditions  of  Creative  Principle.  Some 
hold  greater  consciousness  for  they  who,  as  spirit,  may  seek  it. 

Q.    What  form  did  they  take? 

A.  Etheric  form,  spiritual  form,  divine  form,  whatever  is 
necessary  to  enter  and  absorb  whatever  they  may  require. 

Q.    What  is  divine  form? 

A.  It  is  that  form  which  can  always  be  distinguished  by 
its   radiance,  clearness  and   pureness. 

Spiritual  form  has  more  of  a  tangibility,  as  usually  they  are 
spirits  created  for  earth;  while  that  which  has  divine  form  are 
those  that  hold  a  condition  that  earth  has  nothing  to  do  with. 

Etheric  form,  as  you  know,  is  utilized  always  by  spirit  who 
wish  to  traverse  any  place  or  any  condition. 

The  power  of  etheric  form  is  more  adjustable  to  all  condi- 
tions. 

Q.  Marcus,  in  the  placing  of  intelligence  into  everything, 
what  really  was  it  for? 

A.  That  it  might  form  a  portion  to  answer  to  the  demand 
of  spirit  that  it  might  become  that  which  could  be  utilized  in 
a  higher  degree  and  molded  into  a  more  perfect  condition. 


145 


LESSON  XIV 


MARCUS— AprU  3,  1919 

Wait  a  minute,  we  have  someone  to  come  that  they 
may  hear  this,  for  long  they  dwelleth  within  Constanti- 
nople and  they  knew  every  portion  of  it,  but  they  know- 
eth  not  of  that  which  lay  within  the  Mosque  within  the 
city. 

IsitAbud?    Yes. 

Is  this  Emelech  with  you,  tonight,  Marcus?  Yes. 
You  know  there  is  a  knowledge  that  cometh  from  master 
to  master  and  we  who  bring  it  unto  they  who  have  a 
physical  body,  learn  from  that  that  there  are  conditions 
and  ties  where  such  knowledge  belongeth  to  the  other; 
like  unto  when  thou  wert  spirit  and  I  was  physical  and 
thou  wert  with  me  and  knew  of  many  things,  and  now 
thou  art  physical  and  I  am  spirit  and  I  cometh  and  I 
know  of  many  things  that  thou  hast. 


Marcus  says — Like  the  placing  of  all  history,  I  must 
say  that  we  must  begin  at  the  beginning.  And  this  great 
knowledge  not  only  belongeth  unto  Constantinople,  but 
belongeth  unto  Jerusalem,  as  well. 

First,  the  wonderful  enactment  of  it  all  was  within 
Egypt  that  is  not  of  earth.  The  first  knowledge  of  the 
symbols,  the  first  great  thought  that  was  to  be  placed 
within  them  and  the  first  great  coming  together  of  not 
only  you  and  Emelech,  but  Abud  and  Imhotep  and  the 

146 


master  who  lives  in  the  North,  all  of  us  were  together  in 
Egypt,  and  the  great  master  who  was  there  taught  us  the 
formation  and  the  words  within  the  symbols.  This  was 
before  the  foundations  of  the  earth  were  laid,  and  before 
we  had  learned  the  knowledge  of  the  placing  of  the  stones 
therein,  which  was  in  this  great  condition  where  each  of 
us  learned  from  what  Universe  we  came.*  And  he  who 
was  of  the  House  of  Israel  gave  unto  us  this  thought: 
That  when  the  great  fulfillment  was  complete  he  would 
be  ready  to  give  us  a  knowledge  of  its  fulfillment. 

Many  and  great  have  been  the  days  since  then,  and 
many  and  great  have  been  the  wonderful  conditions  cre- 
ated. And  he  passed  from  place  to  place  and,  as  spirit, 
he  entereth  into  the  conditions  of  the  second  habitation ; 
yet  when  he  entereth  the  physical  he  kneweth  not  the 
meaning  of  it  save  that  he  knew  that  he  stood  within  the 
threshold  of  the  Temple  of  Jerusalem  and  he  learneth  of 
many  things. 

Now  there  cometh  with  us  one  who  searched  far  and 
wide  that  he  might  bring  unto  these  conditions  a  higher 
knowledge,  that  he  who  is  the  master  of  the  High  Heav- 
ens should  have  the  knowledge  of  the  Book  out  of  which 
no  man  hath  read.  And  he  brought  from  out  of  the  waste 
places  the  link  that  connected  the  past  age  with  the  pres- 
ent age  and  he  serveth  no  man,  yet  doth  thou  know  that 
without  this  link  we  could  not  procure  the  knowledge  we 
need.  And  now  that  the  time  is  ready  it  will  be  needful 
that  that  which  is  beneath  the  sand  of  the  desert  shall  be 
brought  forth  that  they  who  are  ready  for  the  knowledge 
may  receive  it  and  use  it. 

All  this  came  to  us  as  we  were  within  Egypt. 

And  once  more  we  made  our  way,  as  thou  knowest, 
we  went  unto  Constantinople,  and  thou  knowest  why  we 


♦Does  this  mean  the  stones  in  the  foundation  of  the  earth? 
Yes. 

147 


went  and  what  was  our  errand.  But  there  is  a  time  that 
came  afterward  when  there  came  unto  you,  within  the 
Seventh  Universe  a  Messenger,  Imhotep,  and  he  saith 
unto  thee :  "Thou  must  come  unto  the  City  of  Jerusalem 
and  thou  must  learn  and  get  knowledge  that  is  placed 
within  the  Temple  by  Solomon,  and  when  thou  cometh 
thou  shalt  bring  a  measure,  and  when  thou  entereth  the 
Temple  he  who  is  of  the  High  Heavens  shall  wait  with 
thee,  with  Emelech  and  John  the  Baptist."  And  thou 
didst  go  unto  the  Temple  of  Jerusalem  and  thou  didst 
take  with  thee  a  measure  and  thou  didst  measure  the  Ark 
and  the  Holy  of  Holies  and  thou  didst  measure  the  rent 
in  the  Veil  that  was  within  the  Ark  that  had  been  placed 
there  and  another  placed  within  its  place ;  and  thou  didst 
measure  the  folds  of  the  Veil  and  thou  didst  measure  the 
rent  within  it,  and  then  thou  didst  go  into  the  outer  court 
of  the  Temple  and  thou  didst  measure  the  pillars  and  thou 
didst  measure  the  foundations.  And  he  who  was  of  the 
High  Heavens  came  unto  thee  and  he  said  unto  thee: 
"Hast  thou  measured?"  And  thou  didst  say:  "It  is  3 
cubits  and  10  cubits  and  4  cubits  and  28  cubits."  And 
he  turned  and  he  said  unto  thee:  "Wouldst  thou  come 
with  me  into  the  vast  inner  court,  I  wouldst  show  thee 
what  no  man  hath  seen  within  the  Temple?"  And  thou 
didst  go  with  him  and  no  human  man  was  there  and  the 
dome  of  the  Temple  was  opened  and  there  stood  within 
the  Temple  12  of  the  Daughters  of  Jefpheta  and  12  of 
the  planetary  spirits  of  Jupiter  and  12  of  the  Sons  of 
Herschel,  and  they  stood  in  the  center  of  the  Temple  and 
he  who  was  of  the  High  Heavens  spake  unto  them ;  and 
the  Daughters  of  Jefpheta  lifted  above  the  Temple  a 
great  star  and  there  were  eight  points  within  it  and  in 
the  center  of  it  was  a  disc  that  revolved  with  five  needles. 
And  he  of  the  High  Heavens  said  unto  thee:  "Seeth 
thou  this  ?"     And  thou  saith  unto  him :    "Yea  verily,  for 

148 


the  star  cometh  across  the  great  spaces  and  the  measure- 
ment within  it  is  what  shall  bring  from  out  of  five  na- 
tions that  which  hath  never  been  given  unto  the  earth 
before."*  And  the  master  from  the  High  Heavens  spake 
again  unto  the  Daughters  of  Jefpheta  and  one  of  them 
stepped  forth  and  she  said  unto  him:  "I  have  chosen 
from  out  of  all  the  conditions  that  I  shall  leave  my  con- 
sciousness of  Infinite  Spirit  within  the  planet  Jupiter  and 
I  shall  come  unto  the  earth  and  I  shall  use  a  planetary- 
spirit  and  a  physical  body;  and  that  which  shall  occupy 
and  be  worked  out  by  the  five  nations  of  the  earth  will 
be  many,  many  days  from  now/'  And  the  master  of  the 
High  Heavens  took  a  solid  grey  veil  and  he  placed  it 
around  her  and  he  said:  "Thou  art  wise  and  thou  wilt 
serve,  but  thou  wilt  not  serve  within  a  physical  body  with 
thy  planetary  spirit."t  And  they  who  came  from  out 
of  the  planet  Jupiter  and  from  Herschel  stood  in  a  circle 
and  the  master  of  the  High  Heavens  spake  unto  each  one 
and  they  gave  him  a  link  of  a  chain  and  he  took  it  within 
his  hand  and  there  were  70  links  and  he  gave  it  unto  thee 
and  thou  didst  hold  it,  and  it  became  welded  together. 
And  he  said  unto  thee:  "I  will  wait  for  thee  and  when 
the  time  cometh  when  I  shall  near,  in  physical  life,  the 
numbers  of  the  years  that  are  within  the  chain,  I  will 
know  that  it  is  given  unto  us  to  understand  the  work  of 
our  Creator.  And  thou  shalt  come  from  out  of  thine  Uni- 
verse and  thou  shalt  be  with  us  in  the  spirit."  And  he 
showed  you  the  great  Temple  of  Solomon,  and  then  each 
of  us  went  our  way. 

Once  more,  he  who  was  known  as  the  King  of  Baby- 
lon, made  great  preparations,  and  John  the  Baptist,  in 


♦What  five  nations  are  these? 

They  are  yet  to  be. 

•j-Who  is  she? 

She  was  the  spirit  of  the  five  nations  that  are  to  be. 

149 


the  spirit,  cometh  from  out  of  the  waste  places  and  he 
Cometh  unto  Babylon  and  he  goeth  unto  her  who  was 
placed  to  watch  over  Babylon  until  the  King's  son  should 
come  and  rule.  And  the  King  went  his  way  unto  the 
spirit  and  she  ruled  his  people ;  and  the  young  King  went 
everywhere  until  it  was  time  that  he  should  return.  And 
you  and  Imhotep  and  Emelech  and  myself  goeth  to  Baby- 
lon, and  John  the  Baptist  came  and  he  brought  from  out 
of  the  waste  places  the  great  jewel  of  the  desert  and  he 
gave  it  unto  the  young  King  and  he  saith  unto  him :  "It 
is  time  that  thou  shouldst  make  preparations  for  the  mas- 
ters are  here  and  they  goeth  unto  the  Temple  and  they 
lighteth  the  sacred  fire  and  all  of  his  people  waiteth  out- 
side." And  we  goeth  within,  and  John  the  Baptist  stand- 
eth  at  the  arch  of  the  Temple  and  he  who  is  the  Divine 
Master  came  unto  them  and  they  gave  Him  all  glory  and 
power  and  dominion.  And  the  young  King  said  unto 
Him:  "Thou  art  the  King,  not  I."  And  he  who  was  a 
master  of  the  High  Heavens  called  unto  thee  and  he  said : 
"Thou  shalt  dwell  with  me  within  the  tent  and  thou  shalt 
learn  the  knowledge  of  the  House  of  Israel  and  there  shall 
come  a  time  when  thou  shalt  understand  and  know  the 
meaning  of  all  this  and  why  the  Master  cometh  unto  they 
who  form  a  portion  wherein  the  House  of  Israel  shall 
reign  first  and  the  House  of  Egypt  shall  reign  second; 
and  the  third  reign  shall  be  a  heathen  reign;  and  then 
once  more  shall  the  House  of  Egypt  restore  it  unto  what 
it  is  to  be.* 

And  again  we  goeth  our  way  and  once  more  there 
cometh  unto  us  he  who  is  the  Messenger  and  he  saith: 
"Once  again  we  goeth  unto  Constantinople,  for  the  time 
is  almost  when  from  out  of  the  confines  of  the  Temples 


♦Do  these  reigns  refer  to  the  habitations? 
Yes. 

150 


shall  they  of  the  Tribe  of  Ishmael  take  that  which  be- 
longeth  unto  John  the  Baptist.  He  placed  it  there  and 
they  will  remove  it."  And  I  say  unto  thee  the  time 
and  age  and  the  hour  hath  come  and  they  who  claim  the 
right  to  be  of  the  House  of  Israel  and  are  not  of  the 
House  of  Israel,  seeketh  this  knowledge;  but  it  is  not 
there.  And  I  say  unto  thee,  when  we  goeth  unto  Con- 
stantinople we  meeteth  they  who  were  to  be  with  us  and 
once  more  we  entereth  the  Mosque  and  this  time  there 
are  five  of  us  and  we  lifteth  the  stone  and  we  lifteth  the 
dark  stone  and  we  readeth  the  symbols  thereon.  The 
first  symbol  is  the  knowledge  of  the  first  creation  of 
universes.  And  the  second  knowledge  is  the  knowledge 
that  bindeth  all  spirit  together.  And  the  third  knowledge 
is  the  fulfillment  of  all  prophecies.  And  the  fourth 
knowledge  was  when  John  the  Baptist  in  the  waste  places 
stood  in  the  presence  of  a  Messenger  of  the  Father  and 
was  taught  the  great  things  that  the  Father  had  to  teach, 
and  He  saith  unto  him:  "Thou  shalt  write  and  there 
shall  be  no  man  read  it  until  many  days  pass  away."  And 
thou  didst  see  them  turn  the  black  stone  and  upon  either 
side  of  it  were  written  these  words :  "Holiness  and  great- 
ness and  glory  unto  all  that  liveth  purely  in  the  presence 
of  the  light  and  there  shall  be  a  bringing  together  of  they 
who  are  great  in  spirit  and  they  shall  loosen  the  bonds  of 
the  earth  and  they  shall  seek  in  the  prisons  and  in  the 
waste  places  for  they  who  are  bound  with  bonds  and  they 
shall  unroll  the  scroll  of  the  High  Heavens  and  they  shall 
read  what  is  written  therein  and  they  shall  know  the 
meaning  of  that  which  man  claimeth  holdeth  no  knowl- 
edge. And  then  they  lifted  the  white  stone  and  upon  it 
is  engravened  the  great  knowledge  under  which  all  spirit 
shall  live.  And  the  first  that  was  written  is  like  unto 
this:  "And  in  the  eternal  light  shall  spirit  dwell  and  in 
the  presence  of  that  which  the  Father  hath  for  them 

151 


shall  they  abide.  And  following  it  was  this :  "And  there 
shall  come  from  out  of  the  High  Heavens  a  greater  glory 
and  a  greater  fulfillment ;  and  once  more  shall  the  Infinite 
give  unto  them  Laws  that  shall  control  and  they  shall 
obey,  and  they  shall  not  be  called  upon  to  build,  for 
already  it  shall  have  been  builded.  And  they  shall  not  be 
called  upon  to  change,  for  all  things  have  been  changed/' 
And  again  they  readeth :  "And  there  shall  not  be  neither 
sun  nor  moon,  but  there  shall  be  one  people  and  the  light 
that  cometh  shall  be  so  full  that  it  shall  be  known  as  the 
multiplicity  of  suns  and  moons." 

And  once  more  they  readeth:  "And  there  shall  be 
brought  together  all  that  that  hath  never  been  known  and 
the  waste  places  of  the  earth  shall  be  filled  full,  so  full 
that  the  earth  cannot  hold  it.  And  the  knowledge  of  life 
shall  be  revealed  and  the  creation  of  spirit  shall  be  as  a 
written  book  which  hath  no  hidden  meaning  within  it." 

And  thou  turneth  unto  he  who  was  the  master  of  the 
High  Heavens  and  thou  saith  unto  him:  "Where  shall 
we  place  the  stones?  for  there  will  come  a  time  when 
there  shall  be  naught  within  the  earth  but  destruction 
and  man  shall  seek  to  destroy  and  deplete  and  do  away 
with  the  symbols  that  holdeth  the  great  knowledge." 
Then  cometh  he  who  was  John  the  Baptist  and  he  hold- 
eth up  his  hands  and  he  saith :  "From  out  of  the  great 
Universe  of  Light  cometh  that  which  shall  protect  this 
and  once  more  we  shall  place  the  stones  in  their  place." 
And  again  thou  saith :  "There  shall  be  conflict  and  war- 
fare and  pestilence  and  every  man's  hand  will  be  against 
every  man  and  they  who  have  held  this  so  long  shall  be 
driven  forth  into  the  desert  without  food  or  an  abiding 
place."  And  then  John  the  Baptist  said:  "When  that 
time  cometh  we  shall  seek  from  out  of  the  spirit  the 
knowledge  of  the  placing  of  these  great  things  and  unto 
.<ii  who  is  the  master  of  the  High  Heavens  thou  shalt  give 

152 


that  he  may  place  it  within  his  memory  and  he  shall  take 
the  knowledge  of  these  stones  and  when  they  who  seek, 
thru  destruction,  to  know  the  meaning  of  the  God  of  the 
Jews,  they  shall  find  nothing  written  there  upon  the 
stones  within  the  Mosque  at  Constantinople. 

Emelech  says,  as  a  High  Priest  of  the  House  of  Israel 
I  Cometh  that  I  may  know  that  the  consciousness  hath 
been  made  correct.  And  I  saith  unto  thee,  that  great  in- 
deed is  the  movement  and  the  consciousness  of  Israel. 
And  I  saith  unto  thee,  that  the  gathering  of  Israel  shall 
be  great  and  there  shall  be  many  of  they  who  shall  seek 
out  and  ask  that  they  be  given  a  place  amidst  they  who 
were  created  before  them.  I,  Emelech,  hath  brought  to- 
gether from  the  great  condition  a  knowledge  that  was 
written  therein  and  I  say  unto  thee :  thou  art  human  and 
I  am  spirit  and  from  the  height  of  the  great  condition  of 
the  High  Heavens  giveth  I  this — Peace  be  unto  thee,  holi- 
ness thy  abiding  place  and  the  hand  of  the  Father  leading 
thee  always. 

Emelech,  High  Priest  of  the  High  Heavens. 


QUESTIONS  AND  ANSWERS 

Q.  Is  this  the  completion  of  the  great  age  of  the  House 
of  Israel — this  knowledge? 

A.  Yea  verily,  and  he  who  is  called  Emelech  says,  that 
the  great  Infinite  calleth  the  House  of  Israel  together  and  they 
shall  pitch  their  tents  and  they  shall  pitch  them  in  a  square 
and  the  square  shall  have  within  it  the  great  wall  that  holdeth 
the  dial,  and  within  the  dial  shall  be  the  eye  that  seeth  all  things. 

Q.     Is  that  what  they  have  been  trying  to  show  me  at  the 
silent  service?     (Mr.  G.) 
A.    Yes. 

Q.    Who  were  they  who  were  created  before?  (Mr.  G.) 
A.     Marcus  says,  they  of  the  Universes  which  numbereth 
to  the   12th  were  created  before  the  High  Heavens. 

153 


Q.  Marcus,  which  are  the  seven  great  Universes  that  Liv- 
ing Thought  spake  of?     (Mr.  G.) 

A.  They  belong  beyond  the  rhythm  of  the  Uram,  beyond 
the  Unit  Universes. 

Q.     Not  Universes  we  have  any  knowledge  of? 

A.     No. 

Thou  saith,  who  are  they  who  were  created  before  the  High 
Heavens?  Knowest  thou  not  that  the  High  Heavens  lieth  close 
to  the  orbit  of  the  earth,  and  as  a  portion  of  the  great  conditions 
of  the  earth;  while  they  of  the  Universes  are  farther  beyond 
and  seeketh  not  the  orbit  of  the   earth. 

Q.  Do  the  High  Heavens  and  all  these  heavens  up  to  the 
High  Heavens  all  belong  to  the  earth?  (Mr.  G.) 

A.    Yes. 

Marcus  says:  Thou  art  asking  and  I  saith  unto  thee:  there 
hath  been  given  unto  me  a  knowledge  of  the  Seven  Heavens 
of  the  Hosts  of  Light  and  I  knoweth  that  thou  shalt  some  time 
hear  about  it.  He  (Marcus)  says,  knowest  thou  not  that  Mar- 
cus builded  walls  and  yet  thou  hast  asked  Marcus  to  tell  thee 
of  many  things. 


154 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN  INITIAL  FINE  OF  25  CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
THIS  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  50  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY  AND  TO  $1.00  ON  THE  SEVENTH  DAY 
OVERDUp— r--  -  -  -^..^  -^-    •    — -~-«''"    -^j 


ubrhry  use 

'^oy  20  mo 


ft  PR  22  tm 


^'^^ff^ 


tUy  !^C 


%f 


m 


l3rfar'52JK 


'""'^^yobvsQ 


l5Mar5  2L0 


JAM  4    '68-iPM 


REC'D  LD 


APRl'^lflST 


l-lBRARV  "S^ 


f CB  26 19S9 


^^ 


<^^Ci 


T9!^ 


t4 


.D  21-100m-7,':59(402s) 


VB  13273 


415560 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


